{"title":"Speaker \u0026 Subwoofer Isolation Stands","description":null,"products":[{"product_id":"isoacoustics-aperta-300-speaker-stands-black-each","title":"IsoAcoustics Aperta 300 Speaker Stands - Black - Each","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Wide Aperta for Center Channels and Broad Cabinets up to 60 Pounds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe IsoAcoustics Aperta 300 is sold singly, one stand per box. It is the wide-format Aperta, 11.8 inches across, made for a center channel or a broad bookshelf speaker of up to 60 pounds. Like the other Aperta stands, it tilts up to 6.5 degrees to aim the drivers at the listener.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA speaker on a cabinet or shelf drives energy into the surface, and the surface sends it back into the cabinet. IsoAcoustics designs the Aperta 300 so that energy is managed by isolators in the top and bottom of the frame. The speaker rides on the isolators, not the shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eBuilt Wide for the Speaker That Sits Under the Screen\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFit, Load and Materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach Aperta 300 carries up to 60 pounds. No minimum is published, but an isolator loaded far under its rating never reaches its working range, so a small, light center speaker may be better served by the Aperta. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e confirms the match.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe stand is 11.8 inches wide, 7.9 inches deep and 3 inches tall, so it raises the speaker three inches. The frame is solid aluminum in black, with IsoAcoustics isolators in the top and bottom sections. The speaker sits on the top frame; nothing is fastened to it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe tilt adjusts up to 6.5 degrees up or down with gradation marks, so a center channel below the screen can be angled up toward the seats. It is made for a cabinet top, shelf, credenza or floor stand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the Aperta 300 Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour center channel sits below the screen\u003c\/strong\u003e — the upward tilt aims its drivers at the seats instead of the ceiling\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou own a wide bookshelf speaker of up to 60 pounds\u003c\/strong\u003e — the 11.8-inch frame supports a broad cabinet across its full width\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour speaker is on a cabinet or credenza\u003c\/strong\u003e — three inches of lift and the isolators take it off the furniture surface\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou need one stand, not a pair\u003c\/strong\u003e — sold singly, so a single center or a third speaker is covered without a spare\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour speaker is narrow and light\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-aperta-speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAperta\u003c\/a\u003e, rated 35 pounds a stand, keeps a smaller cabinet inside its working range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do You Set It Up?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSet the stand where the speaker will go, logo facing forward. Place the speaker centered on the top frame. Adjust the tilt until the drivers point at the main seat and read the mark so you can repeat it. Sit down and listen.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat most Aperta 300 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — get the tweeters to ear height before you isolate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/floor-carpet-protection-discs\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eFloor and carpet protection discs\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a firm footing on carpet or a soft floor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the next link in the chain after the speakers are settled\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speakers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeakers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the bookshelf and desktop models these are made to sit under\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOne stand per speaker. The Aperta 300 is sold singly, so order one for a center channel or two for a stereo pair of wide speakers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhich Aperta fits my speakers?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eGo by the weight and footprint of one speaker: Aperta up to 35 pounds, Aperta200 up to 75, Aperta 300 up to 60 for wide cabinets. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e settles borderline cases.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow does the tilt adjustment work?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe stand tilts up to 6.5 degrees upward or downward, and gradation marks show the setting. A center channel below the screen is usually tilted up toward the seats.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill a floorstanding speaker sit on it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics rates the Aperta 300 for speakers up to 60 pounds on a cabinet, shelf or stand. Floorstanders are better served by the threaded GAIA isolators.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size: 1.25em; margin: 1.4em 0 0.35em 0; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.5em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics unboxes the Aperta stands and demonstrates the tilt adjustment across the three sizes:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/qdQZ7tG1RCA\" title=\"IsoAcoustics Aperta Series Speaker Isolation Stand Unboxing Video\" style=\"border: 0; margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; display: block;\"\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, desktop speakers, or vibration control? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"IsoAcoustics","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45980615671981,"sku":"NEW-IAAPER300-BLK-EA","price":179.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/IAAPER300_BLK_02-Large__63077.1730358584.1280.1280.jpg?v=1778094492"},{"product_id":"isoacoustics-gaia-i-speaker-isolators-set-of-4","title":"IsoAcoustics GAIA I Speaker Isolators - Set of 4","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThreaded Isolation Feet for Floorstanders up to 220 Pounds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe IsoAcoustics GAIA I is the largest of the three original GAIA isolators. It is sold here singly and as a set of four, and every speaker takes four. A set carries a floorstanding speaker or subwoofer of up to 220 pounds. The feet screw into the same inserts the factory spikes came out of.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA floorstander drives its own energy into the floor, and the floor sends it straight back up into the box. IsoAcoustics designs the GAIA to manage that energy inside the foot. The housing is fixed to the speaker, and only the lower isolator touches the floor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eMade for the Heaviest Speakers Still Standing on Spikes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFit, Load and Materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA set of four GAIA I carries 220 pounds, so each foot handles 55. No minimum is published. A foot carrying far less than its rating never settles into its working range. A 90-pound speaker belongs on the GAIA II and a 60-pound speaker on the GAIA III. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e sorts this by weight.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach GAIA I is 2.5 inches across and 1.9 inches tall, in a machined dark chrome metal housing. It replaces the spike or foot rather than sitting under it. The change in speaker height depends on what came out. Three thread adaptors are included: M8-1.25, M12-1.25 and 1\/4 inch-20.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIf your speaker uses another thread, IsoAcoustics supplies other sizes. Its \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/isoacoustics.com\/home-audio-isolation-products\/gaia-series\/gaia-thread-sizes\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eGAIA thread-size guide\u003c\/a\u003e explains how to measure. The lower isolator is made to grip a hard floor. On thick carpet, the matching carpet discs give it a solid surface to stand on.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eRobert Deutsch tried a GAIA I set under his Monitor Audio speakers for \u003cem\u003eStereophile\u003c\/em\u003e. He found that “instruments and voices were more precisely defined on the soundstage, which itself was wider and higher.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eTheo Nicolakis ran GAIA I under his own speakers for \u003cem\u003eAudioholics\u003c\/em\u003e. He wrote: “In every instance the GAIA isolators improved the top to bottom performance of my two reference setups.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eStereophile\u003c\/em\u003e lists the GAIA I in its Recommended Components for 2025, and it named the GAIA and OREA isolation feet its Accessory of 2019.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the GAIA I Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou own floorstanders of 120 to 220 pounds each\u003c\/strong\u003e — four GAIA I per speaker carry them inside the working range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour speakers have threaded spike inserts\u003c\/strong\u003e — the housing screws into the cabinet, so the foot moves with the speaker\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour floor is hardwood, tile or concrete\u003c\/strong\u003e — the lower isolator grips a hard surface without spikes marking it\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou have a large subwoofer\u003c\/strong\u003e — IsoAcoustics rates the GAIA I for subwoofers up to 220 pounds as well as speakers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour speakers weigh less than 120 pounds each\u003c\/strong\u003e — the GAIA II, rated 120 pounds a set, keeps a lighter cabinet inside its working range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do You Set Them Up?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eUnscrew the factory spikes and match the thread. One side of the adaptor goes into the speaker and the other into the GAIA housing. Thread each stud in at least four full turns. Turn the logo to face your seat, then tighten the locking nut against the base of the speaker.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLift the speaker into place rather than sliding it, since the lower isolators grip the floor. On thick carpet, set a carpet disc under each foot. Level the cabinet, check that the logos still face forward, and play.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat most GAIA I owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — get the tweeters to ear height before you isolate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/floor-carpet-protection-discs\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eFloor and carpet protection discs\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a firm footing on carpet or a soft floor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the next link in the chain after the speakers are settled\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speakers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeakers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the bookshelf and desktop models these are made to sit under\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eFour per speaker, one at each corner, matching the spikes they replace. The GAIA I is sold singly and as a set of four. Order one set per speaker, or eight for a stereo pair.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhich GAIA fits my speakers?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eGo by the weight of one speaker: GAIA III up to 70 pounds, GAIA II up to 120, GAIA I up to 220. Heavier cabinets take the GAIA Titan. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e settles borderline weights.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill they fit my speaker's threads?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAdaptors for M8-1.25, M12-1.25 and 1\/4 inch-20 come in the box. If your speaker uses another size, IsoAcoustics supplies other adaptors. Its thread-size guide shows how to measure the insert.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I use them on carpet?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. On low pile the lower isolator grips through the carpet. On thicker carpet or an underpad, IsoAcoustics recommends its \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-gaia-i-carpet-spikes-set-of-4\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eGAIA I carpet spikes\u003c\/a\u003e, which give each foot a solid surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much height do they add?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach GAIA I stands 1.9 inches tall. It replaces the spike or foot rather than stacking on it, so the net change depends on the spike that came out. Measure before you order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eStreaky, a UK mixing engineer, fits GAIA I to his speakers and compares the result with the factory spikes:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/k3ExWnCN5kU\" title=\"DOES SPEAKER ISOLATION WORK? - Isoacoustic Gaia 1 - Streaky\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, floor types, or vibration control? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"IsoAcoustics","offers":[{"title":"4 Set \/ New","offer_id":45981152444589,"sku":"NEW-IAGAIAI-4S","price":569.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/IAGAIAI_1-4-Large__87357.1731599625.1280.1280_116c41be-130b-4db5-a954-ae89b3307268.jpg?v=1778145312"},{"product_id":"isoacoustics-gaia-i-speaker-isolators-each","title":"IsoAcoustics GAIA I Speaker Isolators - Each","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThreaded Isolation Feet for Floorstanders up to 220 Pounds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe IsoAcoustics GAIA I is the largest of the three original GAIA isolators. It is sold here singly and as a set of four, and every speaker takes four. A set carries a floorstanding speaker or subwoofer of up to 220 pounds. The feet screw into the same inserts the factory spikes came out of.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA floorstander drives its own energy into the floor, and the floor sends it straight back up into the box. IsoAcoustics designs the GAIA to manage that energy inside the foot. The housing is fixed to the speaker, and only the lower isolator touches the floor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eMade for the Heaviest Speakers Still Standing on Spikes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFit, Load and Materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA set of four GAIA I carries 220 pounds, so each foot handles 55. No minimum is published. A foot carrying far less than its rating never settles into its working range. A 90-pound speaker belongs on the GAIA II and a 60-pound speaker on the GAIA III. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e sorts this by weight.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach GAIA I is 2.5 inches across and 1.9 inches tall, in a machined dark chrome metal housing. It replaces the spike or foot rather than sitting under it. The change in speaker height depends on what came out. Three thread adaptors are included: M8-1.25, M12-1.25 and 1\/4 inch-20.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIf your speaker uses another thread, IsoAcoustics supplies other sizes. Its \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/isoacoustics.com\/home-audio-isolation-products\/gaia-series\/gaia-thread-sizes\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eGAIA thread-size guide\u003c\/a\u003e explains how to measure. The lower isolator is made to grip a hard floor. On thick carpet, the matching carpet discs give it a solid surface to stand on.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eRobert Deutsch tried a GAIA I set under his Monitor Audio speakers for \u003cem\u003eStereophile\u003c\/em\u003e. He found that “instruments and voices were more precisely defined on the soundstage, which itself was wider and higher.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eTheo Nicolakis ran GAIA I under his own speakers for \u003cem\u003eAudioholics\u003c\/em\u003e. He wrote: “In every instance the GAIA isolators improved the top to bottom performance of my two reference setups.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eStereophile\u003c\/em\u003e lists the GAIA I in its Recommended Components for 2025, and it named the GAIA and OREA isolation feet its Accessory of 2019.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the GAIA I Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou own floorstanders of 120 to 220 pounds each\u003c\/strong\u003e — four GAIA I per speaker carry them inside the working range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour speakers have threaded spike inserts\u003c\/strong\u003e — the housing screws into the cabinet, so the foot moves with the speaker\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour floor is hardwood, tile or concrete\u003c\/strong\u003e — the lower isolator grips a hard surface without spikes marking it\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou have a large subwoofer\u003c\/strong\u003e — IsoAcoustics rates the GAIA I for subwoofers up to 220 pounds as well as speakers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour speakers weigh less than 120 pounds each\u003c\/strong\u003e — the GAIA II, rated 120 pounds a set, keeps a lighter cabinet inside its working range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do You Set Them Up?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eUnscrew the factory spikes and match the thread. One side of the adaptor goes into the speaker and the other into the GAIA housing. Thread each stud in at least four full turns. Turn the logo to face your seat, then tighten the locking nut against the base of the speaker.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLift the speaker into place rather than sliding it, since the lower isolators grip the floor. On thick carpet, set a carpet disc under each foot. Level the cabinet, check that the logos still face forward, and play.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat most GAIA I owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — get the tweeters to ear height before you isolate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/floor-carpet-protection-discs\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eFloor and carpet protection discs\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a firm footing on carpet or a soft floor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the next link in the chain after the speakers are settled\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speakers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeakers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the bookshelf and desktop models these are made to sit under\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eFour per speaker, one at each corner, matching the spikes they replace. The GAIA I is sold singly and as a set of four. Order one set per speaker, or eight for a stereo pair.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhich GAIA fits my speakers?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eGo by the weight of one speaker: GAIA III up to 70 pounds, GAIA II up to 120, GAIA I up to 220. Heavier cabinets take the GAIA Titan. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e settles borderline weights.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill they fit my speaker's threads?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAdaptors for M8-1.25, M12-1.25 and 1\/4 inch-20 come in the box. If your speaker uses another size, IsoAcoustics supplies other adaptors. Its thread-size guide shows how to measure the insert.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I use them on carpet?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. On low pile the lower isolator grips through the carpet. On thicker carpet or an underpad, IsoAcoustics recommends its \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-gaia-i-carpet-spikes-set-of-4\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eGAIA I carpet spikes\u003c\/a\u003e, which give each foot a solid surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much height do they add?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach GAIA I stands 1.9 inches tall. It replaces the spike or foot rather than stacking on it, so the net change depends on the spike that came out. Measure before you order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eStreaky, a UK mixing engineer, fits GAIA I to his speakers and compares the result with the factory spikes:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/k3ExWnCN5kU\" title=\"DOES SPEAKER ISOLATION WORK? - Isoacoustic Gaia 1 - Streaky\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, floor types, or vibration control? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"IsoAcoustics","offers":[{"title":"Each \/ New","offer_id":45981548019885,"sku":"NEW-IAGAIAI-1-EA","price":169.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Each \/ Demo","offer_id":45981548052653,"sku":"DEMO-IAGAIAI-1-EA","price":124.37,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/IAGAIAI_1-4-Large__73517.1731599529.1280.1280_6f771612-74d7-4ba6-b966-b98e72b02123.jpg?v=1778107660"},{"product_id":"isoacoustics-iso-430-isolation-stand","title":"IsoAcoustics ISO-430 Isolation Stand","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eA Wide Isolation Stand for a Center Channel or Amp up to 100 Pounds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe IsoAcoustics ISO-430 is sold singly, one stand per box. Its 17-inch frame carries a center channel, a wide studio monitor or an amp of up to 100 pounds. It raises the cabinet 3.5 inches and tilts it up to 6.5 degrees to aim the drivers at the listener.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA wide cabinet on a console or shelf drives energy into the surface, and the surface sends it back. IsoAcoustics designs the ISO stands with isolators in the top and bottom frames, so the speaker rides on the isolators, not the shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Widest ISO Stand, Rated for the Heaviest Load\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFit, Load and Materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach ISO-430 carries up to 100 pounds. No minimum is published. An isolator loaded far under its rating never reaches its working range, so a 30-pound center speaker may sit better on the Aperta 300. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e confirms the match.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe stand is 17 inches wide, 9 inches deep and 3.5 inches tall. Tilt inserts angle it up or down by up to 6.5 degrees, which points a center channel below the screen up toward the seats.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIt assembles by hand from frames, tubes and inserts and is made for a console bridge, cabinet top or shelf. IsoAcoustics also rates it for guitar amps and power amps, where the frame carries the chassis on its isolators.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the ISO-430 Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour center channel sits below the screen\u003c\/strong\u003e — the 17-inch frame carries a wide cabinet and the tilt aims it at the seats\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou run a wide studio monitor of up to 100 pounds\u003c\/strong\u003e — one ISO-430 per cabinet carries it inside the working range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want a guitar or bass amp off the floor\u003c\/strong\u003e — IsoAcoustics rates the stand for instrument amplifiers up to 100 pounds\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou need one stand, not a pair\u003c\/strong\u003e — sold singly, so a single center or amp is covered without a spare\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour cabinet is narrow and light\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-iso-155-isolation-stands-pair\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eISO-155\u003c\/a\u003e or \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-iso-200-monitor-stands-pair\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eISO-200\u003c\/a\u003e, sold in pairs, suits a conventional monitor better\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do You Set It Up?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePress the tubes into the isolators in the bottom frame and fit the top frame. Add the tilt inserts if the drivers need to point up or down. Set the stand where the cabinet will go, logo forward, and center the cabinet on the top frame. Check that it sits level, then play.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat most ISO-430 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — get the tweeters to ear height before you isolate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/floor-carpet-protection-discs\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eFloor and carpet protection discs\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a firm footing on carpet or a soft floor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the next link in the chain after the speakers are settled\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speakers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeakers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the bookshelf and desktop models these are made to sit under\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOne stand per cabinet. The ISO-430 is sold singly, so order one for a center channel or amplifier, or two for a pair of wide monitors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhich ISO stand fits my speakers?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eGo by weight and width: the ISO-130, 155 and 200 are paired stands for monitors up to 20, 40 and 75 pounds. The ISO-430 is the single wide stand for cabinets up to 100 pounds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow does the tilt adjust?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eTilt inserts angle the stand up to 6.5 degrees upward or downward. A center channel below the screen is usually tilted up toward the seats.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill it fit a cabinet wider than 17 inches?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA wider cabinet can sit on the frame as long as it is centered and stable. Check that the weight stays under 100 pounds and that the base is flat.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size: 1.25em; margin: 1.4em 0 0.35em 0; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.5em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003ePaul Morrison of IsoAcoustics runs through the ISO-Stand set-up, with tips for getting the install right first time:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/wqNBHKHQvY4\" title=\"How To Assemble IsoAcoustics ISO-Stands for Speakers and Studio Monitors\" style=\"border: 0; margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; display: block;\"\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, desktop monitors, or vibration control? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"IsoAcoustics","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45981617815725,"sku":"NEW-IAISO430","price":124.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/IAISO430_05-Large__75540.1725507294.1280.1280.jpg?v=1778116206"},{"product_id":"isoacoustics-iso-puck-76-isolation-feet-pair","title":"IsoAcoustics ISO-PUCK 76 Isolation Feet - Pair","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Heavy ISO-PUCK for Big Monitors, Subwoofers and Amp Cabinets\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe IsoAcoustics ISO-PUCK 76 is sold in a box of two. Each puck carries up to 40 pounds. IsoAcoustics calls for at least three under every speaker, so one large monitor or subwoofer needs two boxes. Three pucks carry 120 pounds and four carry 160.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA big cabinet puts real energy into whatever it stands on. The floor or console takes it, then hands it straight back into the box. IsoAcoustics designs the ISO-PUCK 76 to manage that energy inside the puck. The cabinet rides on the isolator instead of the surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eTwice the Load of the Standard Puck, in a Still-Low Profile\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFit, Load and Materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach ISO-PUCK 76 carries up to 40 pounds. Three handle 120 pounds and four handle 160. IsoAcoustics says to stay 10 percent under those limits to allow for uneven weight. No minimum is published, but a puck loaded far under its rating never reaches its working range. A 40-pound monitor belongs on the standard ISO-PUCK.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe 76 in the name is its width in millimeters. Each puck is 3 inches across and 1.5 inches tall, so it raises a cabinet about an inch and a half. IsoAcoustics describes an upper flange that adheres to the underside of the cabinet and a lower isolator that anchors to the surface below.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAll the energy is managed in the core of the puck, and nothing is bolted to the speaker. The puck is made for floor stands, consoles, soffits, stages and hard floors. Set each one with the logo facing forward, in line with the drivers. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e confirms the count.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the ISO-PUCK 76 Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou run large monitors of 60 to 120 pounds each\u003c\/strong\u003e — three pucks per cabinet carry them inside their working range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want a subwoofer off the floor without a stand\u003c\/strong\u003e — an inch and a half of lift decouples it, and four pucks carry up to 160 pounds\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou gig with a bass or guitar cabinet\u003c\/strong\u003e — IsoAcoustics rates the puck for amps on a stage or hard floor, and the pucks pack flat\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour speakers sit in soffits or on a console bridge\u003c\/strong\u003e — nothing is screwed in, so the pucks lift out when the room changes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour speakers weigh less than about 40 pounds each\u003c\/strong\u003e — the standard ISO-PUCK, rated 20 pounds a puck, keeps a lighter monitor inside its working range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do You Set Them Up?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSet three pucks under each cabinet, two in front and one centered at the back, or four at the corners for a wide or deep box. Face the logo forward. Lower the cabinet onto them and press so the flanges seat. Level a subwoofer afterward if the floor is uneven.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat most ISO-PUCK 76 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — get the tweeters to ear height before you isolate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/floor-carpet-protection-discs\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eFloor and carpet protection discs\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a firm footing on carpet or a soft floor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the next link in the chain after the speakers are settled\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speakers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeakers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the bookshelf and desktop models these are made to sit under\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics requires at least three pucks under each speaker or subwoofer, and four for a wide cabinet. Each box holds two. One cabinet needs two boxes and a stereo pair needs at least three.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhich ISO-PUCK model fits my speakers?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eChoose by weight per cabinet: mini 6 pounds a puck, ISO-PUCK 20, ISO-PUCK 76 40. Stay 10 percent under the limit, and use the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e if a cabinet sits near a line.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill it work under a subwoofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. IsoAcoustics lists subwoofers among the uses for the ISO-PUCK series. Use three or four pucks with the logo facing forward. Keep the total weight under the combined rating.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much height does it add?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach puck is 1.5 inches tall and 3 inches across. The cabinet sits on the pucks rather than on its own feet, so it rises about an inch and a half. Check the clearance to any shelf above.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics runs through the three ISO-PUCK models, the ISO-PUCK 76 being the heaviest, and shows the pucks placed under speakers:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/BJOSaC9pYtk\" title=\"IsoAcoustics ISO-PUCK Series - sound clarity and openness for studio monitors and speakers - IsoAcoustics\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about subwoofer placement, studio monitors, or vibration control? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"IsoAcoustics","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45981753311405,"sku":"NEW-IAISPUC76-PR","price":89.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/IAISPUC76_PR_01-Large__12650.1725993027.1280.1280_13994979-81c6-46de-b3ed-519bc0d25bb9.jpg?v=1778116195"},{"product_id":"isoacoustics-delos-isolation-platform-maple-18-x-15-x-3","title":"IsoAcoustics DELOS Isolation Platform - Maple - 18\" x 15\" x 3\"","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eA Butcher-Block Isolation Platform for Turntables up to 100 Pounds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe IsoAcoustics DELOS is sold singly, one platform per box, in maple or walnut, two sizes and two thicknesses. It is a solid hardwood butcher block with IsoAcoustics isolators fastened into its underside, made to carry a turntable or tube amplifier of up to 100 pounds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA turntable stylus reads movements far smaller than the footsteps, speaker energy and motor hum that travel through a shelf. IsoAcoustics designs the DELOS to combine the mass of a thick block with its isolators, so the turntable rides on the isolators rather than on the shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEvery option here carries the same isolation design. The choice comes down to the footprint your turntable needs, the weight it puts on the block, and whether maple or walnut suits the room.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFour Sizes, Two Woods, One Rule: Match the Block to the Weight\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFit, Load and Materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe 18 by 15 inch block has four isolators and carries 65 pounds at 1.75 inches thick or 55 pounds at 3 inches. The 22 by 16 inch block has six isolators and carries 100 pounds at 1.75 inches or 90 pounds at 3 inches. The thicker block weighs more itself, which is why its rating is lower.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNo minimum is published, but an isolator loaded far under its rating never reaches its working range, so a 20-pound turntable sits better on the zaZen. Add the block's thickness to your turntable's height when checking a rack shelf, and allow width for an outboard motor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMaple has a light amber color and a Janka hardness of 1450. Walnut is dark brown with visible grain and a Janka hardness of 1100. IsoAcoustics says both woods perform the same, so the choice is appearance. The isolators are recessed into the block and fastened to it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eJason Thorpe reviewed the walnut 22 by 16 inch DELOS for \u003cem\u003eSoundStage! Ultra\u003c\/em\u003e under his VPI turntable and concluded: “The Delos provides real improvements for a reasonable price.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePaul Rigby tried both sizes for \u003cem\u003eThe Audiophile Man\u003c\/em\u003e and wrote of the smaller block, “I found improvements wherever I used it”, with the biggest change under his preamplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the DELOS Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou own a turntable of 40 to 100 pounds\u003c\/strong\u003e — the four blocks cover that range, and the selector names the one for your weight\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour turntable has an outboard motor\u003c\/strong\u003e — the 22 by 16 inch block gives the motor and the plinth one level, isolated surface\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou run a heavy tube amplifier on a rack\u003c\/strong\u003e — the block carries the chassis and its feet on a single isolated platform\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want the platform to read as furniture\u003c\/strong\u003e — solid maple or walnut, finished as a butcher block, in two thicknesses\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour turntable weighs less than 40 pounds\u003c\/strong\u003e — the zaZen platforms, rated 25 and 40 pounds, keep a lighter deck inside its working range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do You Set It Up?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eClear the shelf and set the DELOS where the turntable will stand. Check that it sits level, since the isolators need even loading. Lower the turntable onto the block, centered, with its own feet on the wood. Re-level the turntable if it has adjustable feet. Cue a record and listen.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat most DELOS owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/turntables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eTurntables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the component that gains most from a still, level base\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/turntable-accessories\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eTurntable accessories\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — levels, mats and clamps for the same setup\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/phono-preamplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003ePhono preamplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the next component in the vinyl chain\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/record-cleaning-accessories\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eRecord cleaning accessories\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a clean groove is the other half of quiet playback\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOne platform per component. The DELOS is sold singly, so order one for the turntable and another for any other component you want to isolate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhich DELOS fits my turntable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eGo by footprint and weight. The 18 by 15 inch block carries 65 pounds at 1.75 inches thick or 55 at 3 inches. The 22 by 16 inch block carries 100 or 90 pounds. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e settles borderline cases.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy does the thicker block carry less?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe 3-inch block is heavier than the 1.75-inch block, and that extra wood loads the same isolators. IsoAcoustics rates the thicker version 10 pounds lower for that reason.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eIs maple better than walnut?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics says the two woods give the same isolation performance. Maple is lighter in color and harder; walnut is darker with more visible grain. Choose the one that suits your rack.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill it fit my turntable and motor?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMeasure the plinth and any outboard motor together. The 18 by 15 inch block suits most single-chassis turntables; a separate motor or a wide plinth usually needs the 22 by 16 inch block.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSee the IsoAcoustics DELOS platform unboxed and examined in both hardwood finishes:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/F6Fu-cwy8U4\" title=\"Unboxing the IsoAcoustics Delos: Isolation Meets Elegance\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSee the DELOS platform explained, sized, and compared with IsoAcoustics’ lighter-duty zaZen platform:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/Fd17qvVsaPM\" title=\"IsoAcoustics zaZen vs Delos Isolation Base Platforms for high end audio\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about turntable setup, rack placement, or vibration control? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"IsoAcoustics","offers":[{"title":"Maple \/ 18\" x 15\" x 3\" \/ New","offer_id":45981858365613,"sku":"NEW-IADELOS-1815M2-MAP","price":549.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/IADELOS_1815M2_01-Large__13245.1725592959.1280.1280_c2b74e71-a254-4e42-9ce9-60b374f98b2e.jpg?v=1778142692"},{"product_id":"isoacoustics-aperta-speaker-stands-with-tilt-adjustment-black-pair","title":"IsoAcoustics Aperta Speaker Stands with Tilt Adjustment - Black - Pair","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Tilting Isolation Stand for Bookshelf Speakers up to 35 Pounds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe IsoAcoustics Aperta is sold as a pair, in black or silver, and each speaker takes one stand. It carries a bookshelf or desktop speaker of up to 35 pounds and tilts it up to 6.5 degrees up or down, so the tweeter can be aimed at your ears from a desk or a low shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA speaker on a desk or shelf drives energy into the surface, and the surface sends it back into the cabinet. IsoAcoustics designs the Aperta so that energy is managed by isolators in the top and bottom of the frame. The speaker rides on the isolators rather than on the desk.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eA Small Footprint That Carries Most Bookshelf Speakers\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFit, Load and Materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach Aperta stand carries up to 35 pounds. No minimum is published, but an isolator loaded far under its rating never reaches its working range, so a very small desktop speaker may be better served by pucks. Speakers heavier than 35 pounds step up to the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-aperta200-isolation-stands-with-tilt-adjustment\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAperta200\u003c\/a\u003e. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e confirms the match.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe stand is 6.1 inches wide, 7.5 inches deep and 3 inches tall, so it raises the speaker three inches. The frame is machined aluminum, finished in black or silver, with IsoAcoustics isolators set into the top and bottom sections. The speaker sits on the top frame; nothing is screwed to it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe tilt adjusts up to 6.5 degrees upward or downward. The Aperta is made for a desk, shelf, credenza or a floor stand. On a floor stand whose top plate is smaller than the stand, the Aperta Plates give it a full-size surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eRobert Deutsch heard the Aperta demonstrated for \u003cem\u003eStereophile\u003c\/em\u003e and reported “a general tightening of the bass and less smearing in the midrange, and even the treble.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eGary Galo reviewed the Aperta for \u003cem\u003eAudioXpress\u003c\/em\u003e and found that “Both the bass and midrange show improved clarity and definition” with the stands in place.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the Aperta Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour speakers sit on a desk or a low shelf\u003c\/strong\u003e — the tilt aims the tweeter at your ears instead of your chest\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou own bookshelf or desktop speakers of up to 35 pounds each\u003c\/strong\u003e — one Aperta per speaker carries them inside the working range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want the speaker off the surface without bolting anything\u003c\/strong\u003e — it simply sits on the top frame, so it comes off in seconds\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou have a floor stand with a small top plate\u003c\/strong\u003e — the Aperta Plates extend the surface so the stand sits flat\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour speakers weigh more than 35 pounds each\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-aperta200-isolation-stands-with-tilt-adjustment\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAperta200\u003c\/a\u003e carries 75 pounds a stand\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do You Set Them Up?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSet each stand where the speaker will go, with the IsoAcoustics logo facing forward. Place the speaker centered on the top frame. Adjust the tilt until the tweeter points at your listening position, then check that both stands are set the same. Sit down and listen.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat most Aperta owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — get the tweeters to ear height before you isolate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/floor-carpet-protection-discs\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eFloor and carpet protection discs\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a firm footing on carpet or a soft floor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the next link in the chain after the speakers are settled\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speakers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeakers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the bookshelf and desktop models these are made to sit under\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOne stand per speaker. The Aperta is sold as a pair, so one order covers a stereo pair. A center channel or a single desktop speaker needs one stand from the pair.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhich Aperta fits my speakers?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eGo by the weight and footprint of one speaker: Aperta up to 35 pounds, Aperta200 up to 75, Aperta 300 up to 60 for wide cabinets. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e settles borderline cases.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow does the tilt work?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach stand tilts up to 6.5 degrees upward or downward, so a speaker on a desk can point its tweeter up to seated ear height. Set both stands to the same angle.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill it sit on a floor stand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes, if the top plate is at least the stand's 6.1 by 7.5 inch footprint. For a smaller top plate, the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-aperta-plates-for-aperta-stands-pair\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAperta Plates\u003c\/a\u003e give the stand a full-size surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003esavagegeese tries the Aperta stands under desktop speakers and shows the tilt and the frame up close:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/rbY0FTq6wYA\" title=\"Tech Reviews | Aperta Speaker Stand Isolators | Isoacoustics - savagegeese\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, desktop speakers, or vibration control? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"IsoAcoustics","offers":[{"title":"Black \/ New","offer_id":45981960569005,"sku":"NEW-IAAPERTA-BLK-PR","price":229.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/IAAPERTA_BLK_01-Large__86825.1715953377.1280.1280_3e277d9e-6c8f-4fbe-8762-728702b3c629.jpg?v=1778094821"},{"product_id":"isoacoustics-delos-isolation-platform-walnut-22-x-16-x-1-75","title":"IsoAcoustics DELOS Isolation Platform - Walnut - 22\" x 16\" x 1.75\"","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eA Butcher-Block Isolation Platform for Turntables up to 100 Pounds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe IsoAcoustics DELOS is sold singly, one platform per box, in maple or walnut, two sizes and two thicknesses. It is a solid hardwood butcher block with IsoAcoustics isolators fastened into its underside, made to carry a turntable or tube amplifier of up to 100 pounds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA turntable stylus reads movements far smaller than the footsteps, speaker energy and motor hum that travel through a shelf. IsoAcoustics designs the DELOS to combine the mass of a thick block with its isolators, so the turntable rides on the isolators rather than on the shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEvery option here carries the same isolation design. The choice comes down to the footprint your turntable needs, the weight it puts on the block, and whether maple or walnut suits the room.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFour Sizes, Two Woods, One Rule: Match the Block to the Weight\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFit, Load and Materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe 18 by 15 inch block has four isolators and carries 65 pounds at 1.75 inches thick or 55 pounds at 3 inches. The 22 by 16 inch block has six isolators and carries 100 pounds at 1.75 inches or 90 pounds at 3 inches. The thicker block weighs more itself, which is why its rating is lower.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNo minimum is published, but an isolator loaded far under its rating never reaches its working range, so a 20-pound turntable sits better on the zaZen. Add the block's thickness to your turntable's height when checking a rack shelf, and allow width for an outboard motor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMaple has a light amber color and a Janka hardness of 1450. Walnut is dark brown with visible grain and a Janka hardness of 1100. IsoAcoustics says both woods perform the same, so the choice is appearance. The isolators are recessed into the block and fastened to it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eJason Thorpe reviewed the walnut 22 by 16 inch DELOS for \u003cem\u003eSoundStage! Ultra\u003c\/em\u003e under his VPI turntable and concluded: “The Delos provides real improvements for a reasonable price.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePaul Rigby tried both sizes for \u003cem\u003eThe Audiophile Man\u003c\/em\u003e and wrote of the smaller block, “I found improvements wherever I used it”, with the biggest change under his preamplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the DELOS Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou own a turntable of 40 to 100 pounds\u003c\/strong\u003e — the four blocks cover that range, and the selector names the one for your weight\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour turntable has an outboard motor\u003c\/strong\u003e — the 22 by 16 inch block gives the motor and the plinth one level, isolated surface\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou run a heavy tube amplifier on a rack\u003c\/strong\u003e — the block carries the chassis and its feet on a single isolated platform\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want the platform to read as furniture\u003c\/strong\u003e — solid maple or walnut, finished as a butcher block, in two thicknesses\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour turntable weighs less than 40 pounds\u003c\/strong\u003e — the zaZen platforms, rated 25 and 40 pounds, keep a lighter deck inside its working range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do You Set It Up?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eClear the shelf and set the DELOS where the turntable will stand. Check that it sits level, since the isolators need even loading. Lower the turntable onto the block, centered, with its own feet on the wood. Re-level the turntable if it has adjustable feet. Cue a record and listen.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat most DELOS owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/turntables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eTurntables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the component that gains most from a still, level base\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/turntable-accessories\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eTurntable accessories\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — levels, mats and clamps for the same setup\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/phono-preamplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003ePhono preamplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the next component in the vinyl chain\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/record-cleaning-accessories\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eRecord cleaning accessories\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a clean groove is the other half of quiet playback\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOne platform per component. The DELOS is sold singly, so order one for the turntable and another for any other component you want to isolate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhich DELOS fits my turntable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eGo by footprint and weight. The 18 by 15 inch block carries 65 pounds at 1.75 inches thick or 55 at 3 inches. The 22 by 16 inch block carries 100 or 90 pounds. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e settles borderline cases.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy does the thicker block carry less?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe 3-inch block is heavier than the 1.75-inch block, and that extra wood loads the same isolators. IsoAcoustics rates the thicker version 10 pounds lower for that reason.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eIs maple better than walnut?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics says the two woods give the same isolation performance. Maple is lighter in color and harder; walnut is darker with more visible grain. Choose the one that suits your rack.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill it fit my turntable and motor?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMeasure the plinth and any outboard motor together. The 18 by 15 inch block suits most single-chassis turntables; a separate motor or a wide plinth usually needs the 22 by 16 inch block.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSee the IsoAcoustics DELOS platform unboxed and examined in both hardwood finishes:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/F6Fu-cwy8U4\" title=\"Unboxing the IsoAcoustics Delos: Isolation Meets Elegance\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSee the DELOS platform explained, sized, and compared with IsoAcoustics’ lighter-duty zaZen platform:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/Fd17qvVsaPM\" title=\"IsoAcoustics zaZen vs Delos Isolation Base Platforms for high end audio\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about turntable setup, rack placement, or vibration control? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"IsoAcoustics","offers":[{"title":"Walnut \/ 22\" x 16\" x 1.75\" \/ New","offer_id":45982085087405,"sku":"NEW-IADELOS-2216W1-WAL","price":879.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/IADELOS_1815W1_02-Large__57546.1725593252.1280.1280_5485bf9d-d290-4a3e-b17b-032ef4554e06.jpg?v=1778142705"},{"product_id":"isoacoustics-iso-puck-isolation-feet-pair","title":"IsoAcoustics ISO-PUCK Isolation Feet - Pair","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Studio Puck for Monitors and Bookshelf Speakers up to 60 Pounds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe IsoAcoustics ISO-PUCK is sold in a box of two. Each puck carries up to 20 pounds. IsoAcoustics calls for at least three under every speaker, so a pair of monitors needs two boxes per side. Three pucks carry 60 pounds and four carry 80.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA speaker on a desk drives its own energy straight into the surface, and the surface sends it back into the cabinet. IsoAcoustics designs the ISO-PUCK to take that energy up inside the puck, so the cabinet moves on the isolator rather than with the desk.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eBuilt to Travel, Sized for the Speakers Most Studios Own\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFit, Load and Materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach ISO-PUCK carries up to 20 pounds. Three under a speaker handle 60 pounds and four handle 80. IsoAcoustics says to stay 10 percent under those limits so an uneven cabinet does not overload one puck. No minimum is published, but a puck loaded far under its rating never reaches its working range. A 12-pound monitor belongs on the mini.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe puck is 2.4 inches across and 1.2 inches tall, so it lifts a monitor a little over an inch. \u003cem\u003eSound On Sound\u003c\/em\u003e describes the build as a black anodized aluminum top ring over a silver aluminum lower ring. Soft, slightly dished rubber discs sit top and bottom, and under load they act as gentle suction cups.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe upper disc grips the cabinet and the lower disc anchors to the desk, stand or console. Nothing is screwed or glued. Place each puck with the logo facing forward, in line with the drivers. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e confirms the count for any speaker weight.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eReviewing the ISO-PUCK for \u003cem\u003eSound On Sound\u003c\/em\u003e, Paul White wrote of his comparisons: “In every case an audible improvement in overall clarity and tighter bass dynamics were clearly heard by everyone.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLarry Crane tried them under studio monitors for \u003cem\u003eTape Op\u003c\/em\u003e and reported that “we could hear more focus and clarity in the pair on the ISO-Pucks”. \u003cem\u003eMusicTech\u003c\/em\u003e named the ISO-PUCK its Gear of the Year in 2018.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the ISO-PUCK Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou run monitors or bookshelf speakers of 20 to 60 pounds each\u003c\/strong\u003e — three pucks per speaker carry them inside the working range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour speakers sit on a desk, console or meter bridge\u003c\/strong\u003e — the low profile lifts them barely an inch, so tweeter height hardly moves\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou move between rooms or sessions\u003c\/strong\u003e — the pucks lift off and travel, and give the same footing on the next desk\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou have a guitar or bass amp on a stage or a hard floor\u003c\/strong\u003e — IsoAcoustics rates the puck for amps and cabinets as well as monitors\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour speakers weigh more than 80 pounds each\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-iso-puck-76-isolation-feet-pair\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eISO-PUCK 76\u003c\/a\u003e carries 40 pounds a puck\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do You Set Them Up?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSet three pucks under each speaker, two in front and one centered at the back, or four at the corners for a wide cabinet. Turn each so the logo faces forward. Lower the speaker onto them and press so the top discs seat. There is nothing else to fit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat most ISO-PUCK owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — get the tweeters to ear height before you isolate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/floor-carpet-protection-discs\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eFloor and carpet protection discs\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a firm footing on carpet or a soft floor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the next link in the chain after the speakers are settled\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speakers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeakers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the bookshelf and desktop models these are made to sit under\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics requires at least three pucks under each speaker, and four for a wide cabinet. Each box holds two. A stereo pair needs at least three boxes, or four boxes for four per side.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhich ISO-PUCK model fits my speakers?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eChoose by weight per speaker: mini 6 pounds a puck, ISO-PUCK 20, ISO-PUCK 76 40. Stay 10 percent under the limit, and use the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e if a speaker sits near a line.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eShould I choose the ISO-PUCK or an OREA?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics says the OREA is tuned for home audio, with a narrower weight range and a slightly stronger benefit inside it. The ISO-PUCK covers a wider range. It was designed for studio monitors, amps and DJ gear.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much height does it add?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach puck is 1.2 inches tall and 2.4 inches across. The speaker sits on the pucks rather than on its own feet, so the cabinet rises a little over an inch. Allow for that on a shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics runs through the three ISO-PUCK models, including the standard ISO-PUCK, and shows them going under a pair of monitors:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/BJOSaC9pYtk\" title=\"IsoAcoustics ISO-PUCK Series - sound clarity and openness for studio monitors and speakers - IsoAcoustics\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, desktop monitors, or vibration control? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"IsoAcoustics","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45982165565613,"sku":"NEW-IAISPUCK-PR","price":69.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/iaispuck_pr-large__36692.1726012642.1280.1280_7c9bfaf9-50c2-4aad-8a84-431fbef59321.jpg?v=1778111794"},{"product_id":"isoacoustics-delos-isolation-platform-walnut-22-x-16-x-3","title":"IsoAcoustics DELOS Isolation Platform - Walnut - 22\" x 16\" x 3\"","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eA Butcher-Block Isolation Platform for Turntables up to 100 Pounds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe IsoAcoustics DELOS is sold singly, one platform per box, in maple or walnut, two sizes and two thicknesses. It is a solid hardwood butcher block with IsoAcoustics isolators fastened into its underside, made to carry a turntable or tube amplifier of up to 100 pounds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA turntable stylus reads movements far smaller than the footsteps, speaker energy and motor hum that travel through a shelf. IsoAcoustics designs the DELOS to combine the mass of a thick block with its isolators, so the turntable rides on the isolators rather than on the shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEvery option here carries the same isolation design. The choice comes down to the footprint your turntable needs, the weight it puts on the block, and whether maple or walnut suits the room.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFour Sizes, Two Woods, One Rule: Match the Block to the Weight\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFit, Load and Materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe 18 by 15 inch block has four isolators and carries 65 pounds at 1.75 inches thick or 55 pounds at 3 inches. The 22 by 16 inch block has six isolators and carries 100 pounds at 1.75 inches or 90 pounds at 3 inches. The thicker block weighs more itself, which is why its rating is lower.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNo minimum is published, but an isolator loaded far under its rating never reaches its working range, so a 20-pound turntable sits better on the zaZen. Add the block's thickness to your turntable's height when checking a rack shelf, and allow width for an outboard motor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMaple has a light amber color and a Janka hardness of 1450. Walnut is dark brown with visible grain and a Janka hardness of 1100. IsoAcoustics says both woods perform the same, so the choice is appearance. The isolators are recessed into the block and fastened to it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eJason Thorpe reviewed the walnut 22 by 16 inch DELOS for \u003cem\u003eSoundStage! Ultra\u003c\/em\u003e under his VPI turntable and concluded: “The Delos provides real improvements for a reasonable price.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePaul Rigby tried both sizes for \u003cem\u003eThe Audiophile Man\u003c\/em\u003e and wrote of the smaller block, “I found improvements wherever I used it”, with the biggest change under his preamplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the DELOS Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou own a turntable of 40 to 100 pounds\u003c\/strong\u003e — the four blocks cover that range, and the selector names the one for your weight\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour turntable has an outboard motor\u003c\/strong\u003e — the 22 by 16 inch block gives the motor and the plinth one level, isolated surface\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou run a heavy tube amplifier on a rack\u003c\/strong\u003e — the block carries the chassis and its feet on a single isolated platform\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want the platform to read as furniture\u003c\/strong\u003e — solid maple or walnut, finished as a butcher block, in two thicknesses\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour turntable weighs less than 40 pounds\u003c\/strong\u003e — the zaZen platforms, rated 25 and 40 pounds, keep a lighter deck inside its working range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do You Set It Up?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eClear the shelf and set the DELOS where the turntable will stand. Check that it sits level, since the isolators need even loading. Lower the turntable onto the block, centered, with its own feet on the wood. Re-level the turntable if it has adjustable feet. Cue a record and listen.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat most DELOS owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/turntables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eTurntables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the component that gains most from a still, level base\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/turntable-accessories\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eTurntable accessories\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — levels, mats and clamps for the same setup\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/phono-preamplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003ePhono preamplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the next component in the vinyl chain\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/record-cleaning-accessories\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eRecord cleaning accessories\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a clean groove is the other half of quiet playback\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOne platform per component. The DELOS is sold singly, so order one for the turntable and another for any other component you want to isolate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhich DELOS fits my turntable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eGo by footprint and weight. The 18 by 15 inch block carries 65 pounds at 1.75 inches thick or 55 at 3 inches. The 22 by 16 inch block carries 100 or 90 pounds. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e settles borderline cases.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy does the thicker block carry less?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe 3-inch block is heavier than the 1.75-inch block, and that extra wood loads the same isolators. IsoAcoustics rates the thicker version 10 pounds lower for that reason.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eIs maple better than walnut?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics says the two woods give the same isolation performance. Maple is lighter in color and harder; walnut is darker with more visible grain. Choose the one that suits your rack.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill it fit my turntable and motor?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMeasure the plinth and any outboard motor together. The 18 by 15 inch block suits most single-chassis turntables; a separate motor or a wide plinth usually needs the 22 by 16 inch block.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSee the IsoAcoustics DELOS platform unboxed and examined in both hardwood finishes:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/F6Fu-cwy8U4\" title=\"Unboxing the IsoAcoustics Delos: Isolation Meets Elegance\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSee the DELOS platform explained, sized, and compared with IsoAcoustics’ lighter-duty zaZen platform:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/Fd17qvVsaPM\" title=\"IsoAcoustics zaZen vs Delos Isolation Base Platforms for high end audio\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about turntable setup, rack placement, or vibration control? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"IsoAcoustics","offers":[{"title":"Standard \/ 22\" x 16\" x 3\" \/ New","offer_id":45982181261485,"sku":"NEW-IADELOS-2216W2","price":989.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/IADELOS_1815W1_02-Large__15375.1725503860.1280.1280_1cdf6726-2b6b-4cc5-98df-3012e6fe2ce7.jpg?v=1778106971"},{"product_id":"isoacoustics-aperta200-isolation-stands-with-tilt-adjustment-silver-pair","title":"IsoAcoustics Aperta200 Isolation Stands with Tilt Adjustment - Silver - Pair","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Larger Aperta for Speakers up to 75 Pounds, with Marked Tilt\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe IsoAcoustics Aperta200 is sold as a pair, in black or silver, and each speaker takes one stand. It carries a bookshelf speaker or studio monitor of up to 75 pounds and tilts it up to 6.5 degrees, with graduated markings so both stands can be set to the same angle.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA heavy monitor on a console or shelf puts real energy into the surface, and the surface returns it to the cabinet. IsoAcoustics designs the Aperta200 so that energy is managed by isolators in the top and bottom of the frame. The speaker rides on the isolators rather than on the shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eTwice the Load of the Aperta, in a Stand Still Under Four Inches Tall\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFit, Load and Materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach Aperta200 carries up to 75 pounds. No minimum is published, but an isolator loaded far under its rating never reaches its working range, so a 15-pound speaker sits better on the Aperta. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e confirms the match for your speaker.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe stand is 7.8 inches wide, 10 inches deep and 3.5 inches tall, so it raises the speaker three and a half inches. The frame is solid aluminum, finished in black or silver, with IsoAcoustics isolators in the top and bottom sections. The speaker sits on the top frame; nothing is fastened to it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe tilt adjusts up to 6.5 degrees up or down, with gradation marks to repeat the setting on the second stand. It is made for a console, shelf, credenza or floor stand. On a small top plate, the Aperta200 Support Plates give it a full surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eBarry Rudolph tested the Aperta200 in his control room for \u003cem\u003eMusic Connection\u003c\/em\u003e: “The Aperta 200s are winners and I highly recommend them for any project studio, stereo or home theatre”.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the Aperta200 Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou own bookshelf speakers or monitors of 35 to 75 pounds each\u003c\/strong\u003e — one Aperta200 per speaker carries them inside the working range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour speakers sit on a console bridge or a low shelf\u003c\/strong\u003e — the tilt aims the tweeter at your ears, and the marks let you match both sides\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want the speaker off the surface without bolting anything\u003c\/strong\u003e — it sits on the top frame and lifts off in seconds\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou have a floor stand with a small top plate\u003c\/strong\u003e — the Aperta200 Support Plates extend the surface so the stand sits flat\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour speakers weigh less than 35 pounds each\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-aperta-speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAperta\u003c\/a\u003e, rated 35 pounds a stand, keeps a lighter speaker inside its working range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do You Set Them Up?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSet each stand where the speaker will go, logo facing forward. Place the speaker centered on the top frame. Adjust the tilt until the tweeter points at your listening position and read the mark, then set the second stand to the same mark. Sit down and listen.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat most Aperta200 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — get the tweeters to ear height before you isolate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/floor-carpet-protection-discs\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eFloor and carpet protection discs\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a firm footing on carpet or a soft floor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the next link in the chain after the speakers are settled\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speakers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeakers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the bookshelf and desktop models these are made to sit under\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOne stand per speaker. The Aperta200 is sold as a pair, so one order covers a stereo pair. A single center speaker or monitor needs one stand from the pair.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhich Aperta fits my speakers?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eGo by the weight and footprint of one speaker: Aperta up to 35 pounds, Aperta200 up to 75, Aperta 300 up to 60 for wide cabinets. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e settles borderline cases.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow does the tilt adjustment work?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach stand tilts up to 6.5 degrees upward or downward, and gradation marks show the setting. Set one stand by ear, then match the second to the same mark.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill it sit on a floor stand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes, if the top plate is at least the stand's 7.8 by 10 inch footprint. For a smaller top plate, the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-aperta200-support-plates-pair\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAperta200 Support Plates\u003c\/a\u003e give the stand a full-size surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size: 1.25em; margin: 1.4em 0 0.35em 0; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.5em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics unboxes the Aperta stands and demonstrates the tilt adjustment across the three sizes:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/qdQZ7tG1RCA\" title=\"IsoAcoustics Aperta Series Speaker Isolation Stand Unboxing Video\" style=\"border: 0; margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; display: block;\"\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, desktop speakers, or vibration control? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"IsoAcoustics","offers":[{"title":"Silver \/ New","offer_id":45982188175533,"sku":"NEW-IAPERTA2-SIL","price":289.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Silver \/ Demo","offer_id":45982188208301,"sku":"DEMO-IAPERTA2-SIL","price":189.37,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/IAPERTA2_1-SIL-Large__29761.1730359522.1280.1280_6b26697d-ad50-4a41-9855-29f998a1d5d3.jpg?v=1778094830"},{"product_id":"isoacoustics-gaia-ii-speaker-isolators-set-of-4","title":"IsoAcoustics GAIA II Speaker Isolators - Set of 4","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Mid-Size GAIA for Floorstanders up to 120 Pounds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe IsoAcoustics GAIA II is the middle model of the original GAIA range. It is sold here singly and as a set of four, and each speaker takes four. A set carries a floorstanding speaker or subwoofer of up to 120 pounds. The feet thread into the inserts the factory spikes came out of.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEvery floorstander pushes energy into the floor, and the floor pushes it back into the cabinet. IsoAcoustics designs the GAIA to manage that energy inside the foot. The housing is fixed to the speaker, and only the lower isolator touches the floor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSized for the Floorstanders Most Living Rooms Actually Hold\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFit, Load and Materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA set of four GAIA II carries 120 pounds, so each foot handles 30. No minimum is published. A foot carrying far less than its rating never settles into its working range. A 60-pound speaker belongs on the GAIA III and a 150-pound speaker on the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-gaia-i-speaker-isolators\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eGAIA I\u003c\/a\u003e. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e sorts this by weight.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach GAIA II is 2 inches across and 1.7 inches tall, in a machined dark chrome metal housing. It replaces the spike or foot rather than sitting under it. The change in height depends on what came out. Three thread adaptors are included: M6-1.0, M8-1.25 and 1\/4 inch-20.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIf your speaker uses another thread, IsoAcoustics supplies other sizes. Its \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/isoacoustics.com\/home-audio-isolation-products\/gaia-series\/gaia-thread-sizes\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eGAIA thread-size guide\u003c\/a\u003e explains how to measure. The lower isolator is made to grip a hard floor. On thick carpet, the matching carpet discs give it a solid surface to stand on.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eBob Barrett ran GAIA II under his speakers for \u003cem\u003eHomeTheaterReview\u003c\/em\u003e. He wrote: “With every track, I consistently heard tighter bass and lower midrange, with greater focus and depth.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eCarlo Lo Rasso reviewed the GAIA II for \u003cem\u003eSecrets of Home Theater and High Fidelity\u003c\/em\u003e. He found them “a noticeable and positive improvement in the sonic performance of the Revel F228Be.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eHi-Fi Choice\u003c\/em\u003e gave the GAIA II a five-star review in 2017, and \u003cem\u003eStereophile\u003c\/em\u003e named the GAIA and OREA isolation feet its Accessory of 2019.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the GAIA II Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou own floorstanders of 70 to 120 pounds each\u003c\/strong\u003e — four GAIA II per speaker carry them inside the working range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour speakers have threaded spike inserts\u003c\/strong\u003e — the housing screws into the cabinet, so the foot moves with the speaker\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour floor is hardwood, tile or laminate\u003c\/strong\u003e — the lower isolator grips a hard surface without spikes marking it\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou run a mid-size subwoofer\u003c\/strong\u003e — IsoAcoustics rates the GAIA II for subwoofers up to 120 pounds as well as speakers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour speakers weigh more than 120 pounds each\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-gaia-i-speaker-isolators\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eGAIA I\u003c\/a\u003e carries 220 pounds a set\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do You Set Them Up?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eUnscrew the factory spikes and match the thread. One side of the adaptor goes into the speaker and the other into the GAIA housing. Thread each stud in at least four full turns. Turn the logo to face your seat, then tighten the locking nut against the base of the speaker.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLift the speaker into place rather than sliding it, because the lower isolators grip the floor. On thick carpet, set a carpet disc under each foot. Level the cabinet, check that the logos face forward, and play.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat most GAIA II owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — get the tweeters to ear height before you isolate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/floor-carpet-protection-discs\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eFloor and carpet protection discs\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a firm footing on carpet or a soft floor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the next link in the chain after the speakers are settled\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speakers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeakers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the bookshelf and desktop models these are made to sit under\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eFour per speaker, one at each corner, matching the spikes they replace. The GAIA II is sold singly and as a set of four. Order one set per speaker, or eight for a stereo pair.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhich GAIA fits my speakers?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eGo by the weight of one speaker: GAIA III up to 70 pounds, GAIA II up to 120, GAIA I up to 220. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e settles borderline weights in a few seconds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill they fit my speaker's threads?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAdaptors for M6-1.0, M8-1.25 and 1\/4 inch-20 come in the box. If your speaker uses another size, IsoAcoustics supplies other adaptors. Its thread-size guide shows how to measure the insert.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I use them on carpet?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. On low pile the lower isolator grips through the carpet. On thicker carpet or an underpad, IsoAcoustics recommends its \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-gaia-ii-carpet-disc-set-of-4\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eGAIA II carpet discs\u003c\/a\u003e, which give each foot a solid surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much height do they add?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach GAIA II stands 1.7 inches tall. It replaces the spike or foot rather than stacking on it, so the net change depends on the spike that came out. Measure before you order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics fits GAIA II to a pair of PSB Imagine T3 floorstanders and shows the thread adaptors and the locking nut in use:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/PGrpfzvHR70\" title=\"How to Install IsoAcoustics GAIA II on PSB T3 Speakers - IsoAcoustics\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, floor types, or vibration control? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"IsoAcoustics","offers":[{"title":"4 Set \/ New","offer_id":45982746706093,"sku":"NEW-IAGAIAII-4S","price":339.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/IAGAIAII_4_01-Large__04369.1732634311.1280.1280_b25a7e6d-3ba3-4c65-886d-e328d9460f19.jpg?v=1778118678"},{"product_id":"isoacoustics-delos-isolation-platform-walnut-18-x-15-x-1-75","title":"IsoAcoustics DELOS Isolation Platform - Walnut - 18\" x 15\" x 1.75\"","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eA Butcher-Block Isolation Platform for Turntables up to 100 Pounds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe IsoAcoustics DELOS is sold singly, one platform per box, in maple or walnut, two sizes and two thicknesses. It is a solid hardwood butcher block with IsoAcoustics isolators fastened into its underside, made to carry a turntable or tube amplifier of up to 100 pounds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA turntable stylus reads movements far smaller than the footsteps, speaker energy and motor hum that travel through a shelf. IsoAcoustics designs the DELOS to combine the mass of a thick block with its isolators, so the turntable rides on the isolators rather than on the shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEvery option here carries the same isolation design. The choice comes down to the footprint your turntable needs, the weight it puts on the block, and whether maple or walnut suits the room.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFour Sizes, Two Woods, One Rule: Match the Block to the Weight\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFit, Load and Materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe 18 by 15 inch block has four isolators and carries 65 pounds at 1.75 inches thick or 55 pounds at 3 inches. The 22 by 16 inch block has six isolators and carries 100 pounds at 1.75 inches or 90 pounds at 3 inches. The thicker block weighs more itself, which is why its rating is lower.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNo minimum is published, but an isolator loaded far under its rating never reaches its working range, so a 20-pound turntable sits better on the zaZen. Add the block's thickness to your turntable's height when checking a rack shelf, and allow width for an outboard motor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMaple has a light amber color and a Janka hardness of 1450. Walnut is dark brown with visible grain and a Janka hardness of 1100. IsoAcoustics says both woods perform the same, so the choice is appearance. The isolators are recessed into the block and fastened to it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eJason Thorpe reviewed the walnut 22 by 16 inch DELOS for \u003cem\u003eSoundStage! Ultra\u003c\/em\u003e under his VPI turntable and concluded: “The Delos provides real improvements for a reasonable price.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePaul Rigby tried both sizes for \u003cem\u003eThe Audiophile Man\u003c\/em\u003e and wrote of the smaller block, “I found improvements wherever I used it”, with the biggest change under his preamplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the DELOS Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou own a turntable of 40 to 100 pounds\u003c\/strong\u003e — the four blocks cover that range, and the selector names the one for your weight\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour turntable has an outboard motor\u003c\/strong\u003e — the 22 by 16 inch block gives the motor and the plinth one level, isolated surface\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou run a heavy tube amplifier on a rack\u003c\/strong\u003e — the block carries the chassis and its feet on a single isolated platform\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want the platform to read as furniture\u003c\/strong\u003e — solid maple or walnut, finished as a butcher block, in two thicknesses\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour turntable weighs less than 40 pounds\u003c\/strong\u003e — the zaZen platforms, rated 25 and 40 pounds, keep a lighter deck inside its working range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do You Set It Up?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eClear the shelf and set the DELOS where the turntable will stand. Check that it sits level, since the isolators need even loading. Lower the turntable onto the block, centered, with its own feet on the wood. Re-level the turntable if it has adjustable feet. Cue a record and listen.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat most DELOS owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/turntables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eTurntables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the component that gains most from a still, level base\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/turntable-accessories\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eTurntable accessories\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — levels, mats and clamps for the same setup\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/phono-preamplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003ePhono preamplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the next component in the vinyl chain\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/record-cleaning-accessories\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eRecord cleaning accessories\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a clean groove is the other half of quiet playback\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOne platform per component. The DELOS is sold singly, so order one for the turntable and another for any other component you want to isolate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhich DELOS fits my turntable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eGo by footprint and weight. The 18 by 15 inch block carries 65 pounds at 1.75 inches thick or 55 at 3 inches. The 22 by 16 inch block carries 100 or 90 pounds. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e settles borderline cases.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy does the thicker block carry less?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe 3-inch block is heavier than the 1.75-inch block, and that extra wood loads the same isolators. IsoAcoustics rates the thicker version 10 pounds lower for that reason.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eIs maple better than walnut?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics says the two woods give the same isolation performance. Maple is lighter in color and harder; walnut is darker with more visible grain. Choose the one that suits your rack.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill it fit my turntable and motor?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMeasure the plinth and any outboard motor together. The 18 by 15 inch block suits most single-chassis turntables; a separate motor or a wide plinth usually needs the 22 by 16 inch block.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSee the IsoAcoustics DELOS platform unboxed and examined in both hardwood finishes:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/F6Fu-cwy8U4\" title=\"Unboxing the IsoAcoustics Delos: Isolation Meets Elegance\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSee the DELOS platform explained, sized, and compared with IsoAcoustics’ lighter-duty zaZen platform:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/Fd17qvVsaPM\" title=\"IsoAcoustics zaZen vs Delos Isolation Base Platforms for high end audio\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about turntable setup, rack placement, or vibration control? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"IsoAcoustics","offers":[{"title":"Walnut \/ 18\" x 15\" x 1.75\" \/ New","offer_id":45982768038061,"sku":"NEW-IADELOS-1815W1-WAL","price":659.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/IADELOS_1815W1_02-Large__88446.1725593518.1280.1280_cd65f3f5-1d13-44ee-9440-70058f6c8d70.jpg?v=1778142722"},{"product_id":"isoacoustics-aperta200-isolation-stands-with-tilt-adjustment-black-pair","title":"IsoAcoustics Aperta200 Isolation Stands with Tilt Adjustment - Black - Pair","description":"\u003cp style=\"text-align: center;\"\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/isoacoustics\"\u003e\u003cimg src=\"https:\/\/cdn11.bigcommerce.com\/s-9dk28p8567\/images\/stencil\/original\/image-manager\/isoacoustics-calculator-tile-wide.png?t=1695908560\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"114\"\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSculpted Aluminum, Tilt-Adjustable Acoustic Isolation Stands\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe IsoAcoustics Aperta200 is a sculpted aluminum acoustic isolation stand designed especially for high end hi-fi bookshelf, desktop speakers, and studio monitors. It also works beautifully with large speakers on floor stands, as well as under floorstanding speakers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe Aperta200’s solid aluminum frame and isolator construction has an overall size of 7.8” x 10” and will support large speakers weighing up to 75 lbs. The stand features a low profile of 3.5\", enabling speakers to have a low stance while enhancing their clarity and performance. The stands’ unique tilt adjustment enables you to set the optimum tilt angle, with fine gradation markings provided to ensure precise angle adjustments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003e\"Cleaning up the Sound, Improving the Focus\"\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003e\"Hearing firsthand what the IsoAcoustics stands can do, listening to desktop speakers without them borders on the intolerable,\" reports John H. Darko, \u003cem\u003eDigitalAudioReview.net\u003c\/em\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003e\"What the Aperta stands do is to clean up the sound, improving the focus, allowing you to hear deeper into the sound stage with a better 3 dimensional presentation,\" notes Mike Cox, \u003cem\u003eTNT-Audio.com\u003c\/em\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eDial in the Precise Tilt Angle\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eSculpted from aluminum frames, the Aperta creates a parallelogram structure with isolators in the top and bottom sections to provide a high level of separation of sound. You can immediately hear the results.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eIt couldn't be easier to calibrate the tilt angle desired. The new IsoAcoustics Aperta200 stands feature a unique integrated tilt adjustment to dial-in the optimum tilt angle exactly as you like it. You can adjust the tilt 6.5 degrees upward and downwards to optimize your speaker placement and focus. Fine gradation markings provided to ensure the precision of the angle adjustments. This makes it especially convenient to duplicate the exact same tilt angle with a pair of stands – or more.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eStanding up for the Science of Acoustics\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eA premier audio experience depends not only on the quality of your speakers, but also on the way they are set up. Ever take home a set of speakers that sounded spectacular in the showroom only to find something missing? IsoAcoustics stands use the science of acoustics to help you get the richest, most high fidelity aural experience out of your home audio system investment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eAcoustics is a science. Sound needs to be free, unencumbered by surrounding surfaces and its own physical placement that muffle and distort the music. The solution to the problem of getting the pinnacle of sound from your speakers is to develop an isolation that recognizes and responds to the individual energy of your speakers. More primitive technology exists to improve the sound but doesn’t maximize it. There are many solutions available to improve sound quality but IsoAcoustics maximizes sound to its ultimate level.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eDecades of Expertise\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003ePassionate about luxurious sound, Dave Morrison, the owner of IsoAcoustics, knew he could reach the ultimate sound experience in the home. Applying his expertise in radio and television studios at the Canadian Broadcasting Corporation for close to 20 years, including the largest multi-media center in Toronto: over 1.72 million square feet with recording studios including everything from drama, music and chamber ensembles to special effects, radio and television shows. He transferred his experience and passion into the home environment.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"IsoAcoustics","offers":[{"title":"Black \/ New","offer_id":47280625090733,"sku":"NEW-IAPERTA2-BLK","price":289.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/IAPERTA2_1-BLK-Large__75541.1730359398.1280.1280_b7799472-b096-499f-845f-f46cdfe5a013.jpg?v=1778094827"},{"product_id":"isoacoustics-delos-isolation-platform-maple-22-x-16-x-1-75","title":"IsoAcoustics DELOS Isolation Platform - Maple - 22\" x 16\" x 1.75\"","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width: 720px; margin: 0 auto; padding: 32px 24px 48px 24px; background: #ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size: 1.25em; margin: 0 0 0.35em 0; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eA Butcher-Block Isolation Platform for Turntables up to 100 Pounds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003eThe IsoAcoustics DELOS is sold singly, one platform per box, in maple or walnut, two sizes and two thicknesses. It is a solid hardwood butcher block with IsoAcoustics isolators fastened into its underside, made to carry a turntable or tube amplifier of up to 100 pounds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003eA turntable stylus reads movements far smaller than the footsteps, speaker energy and motor hum that travel through a shelf. IsoAcoustics designs the DELOS to combine the mass of a thick block with its isolators, so the turntable rides on the isolators rather than on the shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003eEvery option here carries the same isolation design. The choice comes down to the footprint your turntable needs, the weight it puts on the block, and whether maple or walnut suits the room.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size: 1.25em; margin: 1.4em 0 0.35em 0; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eFour Sizes, Two Woods, One Rule: Match the Block to the Weight\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size: 1.05em; margin: 0.9em 0 0.25em 0; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eFit, Load and Materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003eThe 18 by 15 inch block has four isolators and carries 65 pounds at 1.75 inches thick or 55 pounds at 3 inches. The 22 by 16 inch block has six isolators and carries 100 pounds at 1.75 inches or 90 pounds at 3 inches. The thicker block weighs more itself, which is why its rating is lower.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003eNo minimum is published, but an isolator loaded far under its rating never reaches its working range, so a 20-pound turntable sits better on the zaZen. Add the block's thickness to your turntable's height when checking a rack shelf, and allow width for an outboard motor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003eMaple has a light amber color and a Janka hardness of 1450. Walnut is dark brown with visible grain and a Janka hardness of 1100. IsoAcoustics says both woods perform the same, so the choice is appearance. The isolators are recessed into the block and fastened to it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size: 1.25em; margin: 1.4em 0 0.35em 0; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003eJason Thorpe reviewed the walnut 22 by 16 inch DELOS for \u003cem\u003eSoundStage! Ultra\u003c\/em\u003e under his VPI turntable and concluded: “The Delos provides real improvements for a reasonable price.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003ePaul Rigby tried both sizes for \u003cem\u003eThe Audiophile Man\u003c\/em\u003e and wrote of the smaller block, “I found improvements wherever I used it”, with the biggest change under his preamplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size: 1.25em; margin: 1.4em 0 0.35em 0; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eWho Is the DELOS Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; padding-left: 1.4em; line-height: 1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou own a turntable of 40 to 100 pounds\u003c\/strong\u003e — the four blocks cover that range, and the selector names the one for your weight\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour turntable has an outboard motor\u003c\/strong\u003e — the 22 by 16 inch block gives the motor and the plinth one level, isolated surface\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou run a heavy tube amplifier on a rack\u003c\/strong\u003e — the block carries the chassis and its feet on a single isolated platform\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want the platform to read as furniture\u003c\/strong\u003e — solid maple or walnut, finished as a butcher block, in two thicknesses\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour turntable weighs less than 40 pounds\u003c\/strong\u003e — the zaZen platforms, rated 25 and 40 pounds, keep a lighter deck inside its working range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size: 1.25em; margin: 1.4em 0 0.35em 0; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eHow Do You Set It Up?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003eClear the shelf and set the DELOS where the turntable will stand. Check that it sits level, since the isolators need even loading. Lower the turntable onto the block, centered, with its own feet on the wood. Re-level the turntable if it has adjustable feet. Cue a record and listen.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size: 1.25em; margin: 1.4em 0 0.35em 0; font-weight: 600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003eWhat most DELOS owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; padding-left: 1.4em; line-height: 1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/turntables\" style=\"color: #8a5a2b;\"\u003eTurntables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the component that gains most from a still, level base\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/turntable-accessories\" style=\"color: #8a5a2b;\"\u003eTurntable accessories\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — levels, mats and clamps for the same setup\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/phono-preamplifiers\" style=\"color: #8a5a2b;\"\u003ePhono preamplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the next component in the vinyl chain\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/record-cleaning-accessories\" style=\"color: #8a5a2b;\"\u003eRecord cleaning accessories\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a clean groove is the other half of quiet playback\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size: 1.25em; margin: 1.4em 0 0.35em 0; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size: 1.05em; margin: 0.9em 0 0.25em 0; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eHow many do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003eOne platform per component. The DELOS is sold singly, so order one for the turntable and another for any other component you want to isolate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size: 1.05em; margin: 0.9em 0 0.25em 0; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eWhich DELOS fits my turntable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003eGo by footprint and weight. The 18 by 15 inch block carries 65 pounds at 1.75 inches thick or 55 at 3 inches. The 22 by 16 inch block carries 100 or 90 pounds. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color: #8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e settles borderline cases.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size: 1.05em; margin: 0.9em 0 0.25em 0; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eWhy does the thicker block carry less?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003eThe 3-inch block is heavier than the 1.75-inch block, and that extra wood loads the same isolators. IsoAcoustics rates the thicker version 10 pounds lower for that reason.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size: 1.05em; margin: 0.9em 0 0.25em 0; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eIs maple better than walnut?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics says the two woods give the same isolation performance. Maple is lighter in color and harder; walnut is darker with more visible grain. Choose the one that suits your rack.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size: 1.05em; margin: 0.9em 0 0.25em 0; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eWill it fit my turntable and motor?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003eMeasure the plinth and any outboard motor together. The 18 by 15 inch block suits most single-chassis turntables; a separate motor or a wide plinth usually needs the 22 by 16 inch block.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size: 1.25em; margin: 1.4em 0 0.35em 0; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.5em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003eSee the IsoAcoustics DELOS platform unboxed and examined in both hardwood finishes:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/F6Fu-cwy8U4\" title=\"Unboxing the IsoAcoustics Delos: Isolation Meets Elegance\" style=\"border: 0; margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; display: block;\"\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.5em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003eSee the DELOS platform explained, sized, and compared with IsoAcoustics’ lighter-duty zaZen platform:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/Fd17qvVsaPM\" title=\"IsoAcoustics zaZen vs Delos Isolation Base Platforms for high end audio\" style=\"border: 0; margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; display: block;\"\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size: 1.25em; margin: 1.4em 0 0.35em 0; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; padding-left: 1.4em; line-height: 1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size: 1.25em; margin: 1.4em 0 0.35em 0; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about turntable setup, rack placement, or vibration control? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color: #8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"IsoAcoustics","offers":[{"title":"Maple \/ 22\" x 16\" x 1.75\" \/ New","offer_id":45983020023981,"sku":"NEW-IADELOS-2216M1-MAP","price":659.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/IADELOS_2216M1_01-Large__52519.1725592628.1280.1280_68932387-750e-439e-8d64-8e2b69935c7d.jpg?v=1778142666"},{"product_id":"isoacoustics-gaia-b-w-adapter-plate-round-for-b-w-nautilus-and-diamond-series-speakers-set-of-4","title":"IsoAcoustics GAIA B\u0026W adapter plate (Round) for B\u0026W Nautilus and Diamond series speakers (Set of 4)","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Plate That Lets a GAIA Screw Into a B\u0026amp;W Nautilus or Diamond\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe IsoAcoustics GAIA B\u0026amp;W Adapter Plate is sold as a set of four. It replaces the ball casters on Bowers \u0026amp; Wilkins Nautilus and Diamond series speakers and gives each corner an M12-1.25 threaded hole, so a GAIA isolator can be fitted where no spike insert exists.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics lists the 800 D, 801 Nautilus, 801 D, 802 D2, 802 Nautilus, 802 D and the CT8 CC, DS and LR as compatible. The D3 and D4 generations use a different plate that we do not carry.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFour Stainless Plates, One Thread Size\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFit, Load and Materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach plate is stainless steel, 2.6 inches across and 0.5 inches thick, and mounts with the speaker's own caster fasteners. The threaded hole is M12-1.25. That thread adaptor is included with the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-gaia-i-speaker-isolators\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eGAIA I\u003c\/a\u003e and sold separately for the GAIA Titan models, so check which isolator the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e recommends for your speaker before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do You Fit Them?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLay the speaker down safely and remove the four ball casters. Bolt a plate to each corner with the fasteners that held the casters. Screw the M12-1.25 stud into each plate, thread on the GAIA, turn the logo toward your seat and tighten the locking nut. Stand the speaker up, level it, and play.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eFour per speaker, one at each caster position. The plates come in a set of four, so order one set per speaker or two for a stereo pair. The GAIA isolators are sold separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhich GAIA goes with these plates?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIt depends on the weight of your speaker. The GAIA I carries 220 pounds a set and the Titan models go higher. The IsoAcoustics online weight selector names the model for each B\u0026amp;W speaker.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill they fit my 800 series D3 or D4?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThese round plates fit the Nautilus and Diamond generations listed above. IsoAcoustics makes a separate D3\/D4 plate for the newer speakers, which we do not stock.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, floor types, or vibration control? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"IsoAcoustics","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45983165808813,"sku":"NEW-IAGABW","price":74.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/IAGABW_01-Large__21365.1730312751.1280.1280_48c16372-37e2-4443-bb95-5bcfc42e00ca.jpg?v=1778116213"},{"product_id":"isoacoustics-iso-130-monitor-stands","title":"IsoAcoustics ISO-130 Monitor Stands","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Small Desktop Stand That Lifts and Aims a Compact Monitor\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe IsoAcoustics ISO-130 is sold as a pair, and each speaker takes one stand. It carries a compact monitor or desktop speaker of up to 20 pounds, raises it to one of two heights, and tilts it up to 6.5 degrees so the tweeter points at your ears rather than your chest.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA small speaker on a desk drives energy into the desktop, and the desktop returns it to the cabinet. IsoAcoustics designs the ISO stands with isolators in the top and bottom frames, so the speaker rides on the isolators instead of the desk.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eTwo Heights and Fourteen Angles from One Small Kit\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFit, Load and Materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach ISO-130 carries up to 20 pounds. No minimum is published, but an isolator loaded far under its rating never reaches its working range. Heavier monitors step up to the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-iso-155-isolation-stands-pair\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eISO-155\u003c\/a\u003e or ISO-200, and the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e confirms the match.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe footprint is 5.1 inches wide by 6 inches deep. Assembled with the short tubes the stand is 2.8 inches tall; with the long tubes it is 8.25 inches. Tilt inserts angle the speaker up or down by up to 6.5 degrees, so a desk, meter bridge or shelf can all put the tweeter at ear height.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe stand ships as a kit of frames, tubes and inserts and assembles by hand in a few minutes. It is made for a desk, console or shelf. If your monitor is wider than the top frame, the frame still carries it as long as the cabinet is centered.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the ISO-130 Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou run compact monitors or desktop speakers of up to 20 pounds each\u003c\/strong\u003e — one ISO-130 per speaker carries them inside the working range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour speakers sit on a desk beside a screen\u003c\/strong\u003e — the tall setting and the tilt bring the tweeter up to seated ear height\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want the speaker off the desk without gluing or screwing\u003c\/strong\u003e — it sits on the top frame and lifts straight off\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour desk space is tight\u003c\/strong\u003e — the 5.1 by 6 inch footprint is barely larger than the base of a small monitor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour speakers weigh more than 20 pounds each\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-iso-155-isolation-stands-pair\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eISO-155\u003c\/a\u003e carries 40 pounds a stand\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do You Set Them Up?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eChoose the short or long tubes, press them into the isolators in the bottom frame, and fit the top frame. Add the tilt inserts if the tweeter needs to point up or down. Set the stand where the speaker will go, logo forward, and center the speaker on the top frame. Sit down and listen.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat most ISO-130 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — get the tweeters to ear height before you isolate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/floor-carpet-protection-discs\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eFloor and carpet protection discs\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a firm footing on carpet or a soft floor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the next link in the chain after the speakers are settled\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speakers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeakers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the bookshelf and desktop models these are made to sit under\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOne stand per speaker. The ISO-130 is sold as a pair, so one order covers a stereo pair of monitors. A third speaker needs one more stand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhich ISO stand fits my speakers?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eGo by the weight and base of one speaker: ISO-130 up to 20 pounds, ISO-155 up to 40, ISO-200 up to 75. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e settles borderline cases.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow do the height and tilt adjust?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eShort tubes give 2.8 inches of height and long tubes 8.25 inches. The tilt inserts angle the stand up to 6.5 degrees up or down, so you can point the tweeter at your ears from a desk or a shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I need tools?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNo tools are needed. The frames, tubes and inserts press together by hand, and the stand comes apart the same way if you want to change the height later.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eGeezer Into Tech sets up the ISO-130 under small monitors and shows the two heights and the tilt inserts:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/RCWNGHfyBw4\" title=\"IsoAcoustics ISO-130 || Review of Speaker Isolation Stands for Studio and Hifi - Geezer Into Tech\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, desktop monitors, or vibration control? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"IsoAcoustics","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45983233605805,"sku":"NEW-IAISO130","price":114.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/IAISO130_01-Large__74930.1730359198.1280.1280_0e33cf84-a07c-40dd-939f-395c6fab475d.jpg?v=1778115169"},{"product_id":"isoacoustics-delos-isolation-platform-walnut-18-x-15-x-3","title":"IsoAcoustics DELOS Isolation Platform - Walnut - 18\" x 15\" x 3\"","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eA Butcher-Block Isolation Platform for Turntables up to 100 Pounds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe IsoAcoustics DELOS is sold singly, one platform per box, in maple or walnut, two sizes and two thicknesses. It is a solid hardwood butcher block with IsoAcoustics isolators fastened into its underside, made to carry a turntable or tube amplifier of up to 100 pounds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA turntable stylus reads movements far smaller than the footsteps, speaker energy and motor hum that travel through a shelf. IsoAcoustics designs the DELOS to combine the mass of a thick block with its isolators, so the turntable rides on the isolators rather than on the shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEvery option here carries the same isolation design. The choice comes down to the footprint your turntable needs, the weight it puts on the block, and whether maple or walnut suits the room.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFour Sizes, Two Woods, One Rule: Match the Block to the Weight\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFit, Load and Materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe 18 by 15 inch block has four isolators and carries 65 pounds at 1.75 inches thick or 55 pounds at 3 inches. The 22 by 16 inch block has six isolators and carries 100 pounds at 1.75 inches or 90 pounds at 3 inches. The thicker block weighs more itself, which is why its rating is lower.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNo minimum is published, but an isolator loaded far under its rating never reaches its working range, so a 20-pound turntable sits better on the zaZen. Add the block's thickness to your turntable's height when checking a rack shelf, and allow width for an outboard motor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMaple has a light amber color and a Janka hardness of 1450. Walnut is dark brown with visible grain and a Janka hardness of 1100. IsoAcoustics says both woods perform the same, so the choice is appearance. The isolators are recessed into the block and fastened to it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eJason Thorpe reviewed the walnut 22 by 16 inch DELOS for \u003cem\u003eSoundStage! Ultra\u003c\/em\u003e under his VPI turntable and concluded: “The Delos provides real improvements for a reasonable price.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePaul Rigby tried both sizes for \u003cem\u003eThe Audiophile Man\u003c\/em\u003e and wrote of the smaller block, “I found improvements wherever I used it”, with the biggest change under his preamplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the DELOS Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou own a turntable of 40 to 100 pounds\u003c\/strong\u003e — the four blocks cover that range, and the selector names the one for your weight\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour turntable has an outboard motor\u003c\/strong\u003e — the 22 by 16 inch block gives the motor and the plinth one level, isolated surface\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou run a heavy tube amplifier on a rack\u003c\/strong\u003e — the block carries the chassis and its feet on a single isolated platform\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want the platform to read as furniture\u003c\/strong\u003e — solid maple or walnut, finished as a butcher block, in two thicknesses\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour turntable weighs less than 40 pounds\u003c\/strong\u003e — the zaZen platforms, rated 25 and 40 pounds, keep a lighter deck inside its working range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do You Set It Up?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eClear the shelf and set the DELOS where the turntable will stand. Check that it sits level, since the isolators need even loading. Lower the turntable onto the block, centered, with its own feet on the wood. Re-level the turntable if it has adjustable feet. Cue a record and listen.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat most DELOS owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/turntables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eTurntables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the component that gains most from a still, level base\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/turntable-accessories\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eTurntable accessories\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — levels, mats and clamps for the same setup\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/phono-preamplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003ePhono preamplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the next component in the vinyl chain\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/record-cleaning-accessories\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eRecord cleaning accessories\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a clean groove is the other half of quiet playback\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOne platform per component. The DELOS is sold singly, so order one for the turntable and another for any other component you want to isolate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhich DELOS fits my turntable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eGo by footprint and weight. The 18 by 15 inch block carries 65 pounds at 1.75 inches thick or 55 at 3 inches. The 22 by 16 inch block carries 100 or 90 pounds. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e settles borderline cases.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy does the thicker block carry less?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe 3-inch block is heavier than the 1.75-inch block, and that extra wood loads the same isolators. IsoAcoustics rates the thicker version 10 pounds lower for that reason.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eIs maple better than walnut?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics says the two woods give the same isolation performance. Maple is lighter in color and harder; walnut is darker with more visible grain. Choose the one that suits your rack.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill it fit my turntable and motor?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMeasure the plinth and any outboard motor together. The 18 by 15 inch block suits most single-chassis turntables; a separate motor or a wide plinth usually needs the 22 by 16 inch block.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSee the IsoAcoustics DELOS platform unboxed and examined in both hardwood finishes:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/F6Fu-cwy8U4\" title=\"Unboxing the IsoAcoustics Delos: Isolation Meets Elegance\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSee the DELOS platform explained, sized, and compared with IsoAcoustics’ lighter-duty zaZen platform:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/Fd17qvVsaPM\" title=\"IsoAcoustics zaZen vs Delos Isolation Base Platforms for high end audio\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about turntable setup, rack placement, or vibration control? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"IsoAcoustics","offers":[{"title":"Walnut \/ 18\" x 15\" x 3\" \/ New","offer_id":45983234490541,"sku":"NEW-IADELOS-1815W2-WAL","price":769.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/IADELOS_1815W1_02-Large__76390.1725592288.1280.1280_c8c1ee4e-0639-4918-9e9a-b37a507541c9.jpg?v=1778142651"},{"product_id":"isoacoustics-gaia-ii-speaker-isolator-each","title":"IsoAcoustics GAIA II Speaker Isolator - Each","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Mid-Size GAIA for Floorstanders up to 120 Pounds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe IsoAcoustics GAIA II is the middle model of the original GAIA range. It is sold here singly and as a set of four, and each speaker takes four. A set carries a floorstanding speaker or subwoofer of up to 120 pounds. The feet thread into the inserts the factory spikes came out of.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEvery floorstander pushes energy into the floor, and the floor pushes it back into the cabinet. IsoAcoustics designs the GAIA to manage that energy inside the foot. The housing is fixed to the speaker, and only the lower isolator touches the floor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSized for the Floorstanders Most Living Rooms Actually Hold\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFit, Load and Materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA set of four GAIA II carries 120 pounds, so each foot handles 30. No minimum is published. A foot carrying far less than its rating never settles into its working range. A 60-pound speaker belongs on the GAIA III and a 150-pound speaker on the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-gaia-i-speaker-isolators\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eGAIA I\u003c\/a\u003e. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e sorts this by weight.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach GAIA II is 2 inches across and 1.7 inches tall, in a machined dark chrome metal housing. It replaces the spike or foot rather than sitting under it. The change in height depends on what came out. Three thread adaptors are included: M6-1.0, M8-1.25 and 1\/4 inch-20.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIf your speaker uses another thread, IsoAcoustics supplies other sizes. Its \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/isoacoustics.com\/home-audio-isolation-products\/gaia-series\/gaia-thread-sizes\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eGAIA thread-size guide\u003c\/a\u003e explains how to measure. The lower isolator is made to grip a hard floor. On thick carpet, the matching carpet discs give it a solid surface to stand on.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eBob Barrett ran GAIA II under his speakers for \u003cem\u003eHomeTheaterReview\u003c\/em\u003e. He wrote: “With every track, I consistently heard tighter bass and lower midrange, with greater focus and depth.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eCarlo Lo Rasso reviewed the GAIA II for \u003cem\u003eSecrets of Home Theater and High Fidelity\u003c\/em\u003e. He found them “a noticeable and positive improvement in the sonic performance of the Revel F228Be.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eHi-Fi Choice\u003c\/em\u003e gave the GAIA II a five-star review in 2017, and \u003cem\u003eStereophile\u003c\/em\u003e named the GAIA and OREA isolation feet its Accessory of 2019.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the GAIA II Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou own floorstanders of 70 to 120 pounds each\u003c\/strong\u003e — four GAIA II per speaker carry them inside the working range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour speakers have threaded spike inserts\u003c\/strong\u003e — the housing screws into the cabinet, so the foot moves with the speaker\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour floor is hardwood, tile or laminate\u003c\/strong\u003e — the lower isolator grips a hard surface without spikes marking it\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou run a mid-size subwoofer\u003c\/strong\u003e — IsoAcoustics rates the GAIA II for subwoofers up to 120 pounds as well as speakers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour speakers weigh more than 120 pounds each\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-gaia-i-speaker-isolators\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eGAIA I\u003c\/a\u003e carries 220 pounds a set\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do You Set Them Up?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eUnscrew the factory spikes and match the thread. One side of the adaptor goes into the speaker and the other into the GAIA housing. Thread each stud in at least four full turns. Turn the logo to face your seat, then tighten the locking nut against the base of the speaker.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLift the speaker into place rather than sliding it, because the lower isolators grip the floor. On thick carpet, set a carpet disc under each foot. Level the cabinet, check that the logos face forward, and play.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat most GAIA II owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — get the tweeters to ear height before you isolate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/floor-carpet-protection-discs\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eFloor and carpet protection discs\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a firm footing on carpet or a soft floor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the next link in the chain after the speakers are settled\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speakers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeakers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the bookshelf and desktop models these are made to sit under\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eFour per speaker, one at each corner, matching the spikes they replace. The GAIA II is sold singly and as a set of four. Order one set per speaker, or eight for a stereo pair.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhich GAIA fits my speakers?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eGo by the weight of one speaker: GAIA III up to 70 pounds, GAIA II up to 120, GAIA I up to 220. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e settles borderline weights in a few seconds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill they fit my speaker's threads?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAdaptors for M6-1.0, M8-1.25 and 1\/4 inch-20 come in the box. If your speaker uses another size, IsoAcoustics supplies other adaptors. Its thread-size guide shows how to measure the insert.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I use them on carpet?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. On low pile the lower isolator grips through the carpet. On thicker carpet or an underpad, IsoAcoustics recommends its \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-gaia-ii-carpet-disc-set-of-4\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eGAIA II carpet discs\u003c\/a\u003e, which give each foot a solid surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much height do they add?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach GAIA II stands 1.7 inches tall. It replaces the spike or foot rather than stacking on it, so the net change depends on the spike that came out. Measure before you order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics fits GAIA II to a pair of PSB Imagine T3 floorstanders and shows the thread adaptors and the locking nut in use:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/PGrpfzvHR70\" title=\"How to Install IsoAcoustics GAIA II on PSB T3 Speakers - IsoAcoustics\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, floor types, or vibration control? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"IsoAcoustics","offers":[{"title":"Each \/ New","offer_id":45983275188397,"sku":"NEW-IAGAIAII-1","price":104.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/IAGAIAII-1_01_front_2024__85230.1732635199.1280.1280_ad5d31ff-be56-4039-9402-b135ecffc1f0.jpg?v=1778159399"},{"product_id":"isoacoustics-aperta-plates-for-aperta-stands-pair","title":"IsoAcoustics Aperta plates for Aperta Stands Pair","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eA Steel Top Plate So an Aperta Stand Fits a Narrow Floor Stand\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe IsoAcoustics Aperta Plates are sold as a pair, one for each stand. They give an Aperta or ISO-155 isolation stand a flat, full-size surface to sit on when the top of a floor stand, bracket or shelf is smaller than the stand's footprint.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach plate is steel with a black powder-coat finish, 8.25 inches long, 6.85 inches wide and 0.1 inches thick. Strips of 3M double-sided tape are included to fasten the plate to the supporting surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSized for the Aperta and ISO-155 Footprint\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFit, Load and Materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe plate matches the 6.1 by 7.5 inch footprint of the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-aperta-speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAperta\u003c\/a\u003e and the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-iso-155-isolation-stands-pair\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eISO-155\u003c\/a\u003e with a margin on each side. It adds a tenth of an inch of height. The stands' own weight ratings still apply, and IsoAcoustics advises checking that the floor stand beneath is stable enough for the stand and speaker.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do You Fit Them?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eClean the top of the floor stand, apply the tape strips to the underside of the plate, and press it down centered. Set the Aperta or ISO-155 on the plate, then the speaker on the stand. Nothing is drilled, and the plate can be lifted off later.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOne plate per stand. The plates come as a pair, which covers a stereo pair of Aperta or ISO-155 stands.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I need these on a wide shelf or desk?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOnly when the surface under the stand is smaller than its footprint. On a desk, credenza or full-width shelf the Aperta stands directly on the surface itself.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill they fit the Aperta200 or ISO-200?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThose larger stands take the Aperta200 Support Plates, which are 10.7 by 8.6 inches. This pair fits the Aperta and ISO-155 only.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, floor types, or vibration control? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"IsoAcoustics","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45983289540781,"sku":"NEW-IAAPERTAP","price":39.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/IAAPERTAP_01_2024__64855.1730312426.1280.1280_a14acca2-73b8-40fa-9512-ebd857bec165.jpg?v=1778118702"},{"product_id":"isoacoustics-carpet-discs-for-gaia-iii-neo-set-of-4-black","title":"IsoAcoustics Carpet Discs for GAIA III Neo - Set of 4 - Black","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCarpet Discs That Give the GAIA III Neo a Solid Floor\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe IsoAcoustics Carpet Discs for GAIA III Neo are sold as a set of four, one for each GAIA III Neo isolator under a speaker. They are made for thick or padded carpet, where the isolator's lower foot would otherwise sink into the pile instead of standing on the floor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach disc has a recessed top that locates the GAIA III Neo foot and three 0.6-inch spikes underneath. The spikes pass through the carpet to the solid floor, so the isolator works on the surface it was designed for.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSized to the GAIA III Neo, Rated for the Same Load\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFit, Load and Materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach disc is solid stainless steel, 2.2 inches across and 0.9 inches tall, and a set of four is rated for 70 pounds, the same as the GAIA III Neo. The recess fits the GAIA III Neo foot only, so choose the disc that matches your isolator. It adds under an inch of height, spikes included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do You Fit Them?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eInstall the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-gaia-iii-neo-speaker-isolators-weight-cap-70-lbs-set-of-4\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eGAIA III Neo\u003c\/a\u003e isolators first and set the speaker in its final position. Then tilt one side of the speaker, slip a disc under each raised foot, and lower it. Repeat on the other side. Most carpet compresses enough for the spikes to reach the floor, and IsoAcoustics says the discs still support the isolators if they do not.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eFour per speaker, one under each GAIA III Neo isolator. The discs come in a set of four, so order one set per speaker or two for a stereo pair.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill these fit another GAIA model?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe recess is sized for the GAIA III Neo foot. IsoAcoustics makes a separate disc for each GAIA and GAIA Neo model, so match the disc to the isolator you own.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I need them on low-pile carpet?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics recommends the discs for thicker pile and carpet with an underpad. On a thin, firm carpet the isolator's foot usually reaches a stable surface on its own.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size: 1.25em; margin: 1.4em 0 0.35em 0; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.5em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics introduces the GAIA carpet discs and shows how they sit between the isolator and the floor:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/QeKz3Qpd-Qk\" title=\"GAIA carpet disk video\" style=\"border: 0; margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; display: block;\"\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, floor types, or vibration control? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"IsoAcoustics","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45983310512301,"sku":"NEW-IAGAIAIIINEOCD-4S-BLK","price":84.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/IAGAIAIIINEOCD-4S-BLK_01_set_of_four_front_2025__30022.1760448767.1280.1280_d9015d4e-4c2b-43d0-b69f-f4c321b2fee1.jpg?v=1778164496"},{"product_id":"isoacoustics-aperta-sub-subwoofer-isolation-platform-black","title":"IsoAcoustics Aperta SUB Subwoofer Isolation Platform - Black","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eA Low Platform That Lifts a Subwoofer off the Floor\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe IsoAcoustics Aperta SUB is sold singly, one platform with four carpet discs in the box. It sits under a front-firing or side-firing subwoofer of up to 80 pounds and raises it just 1.3 inches. Nothing is bolted to the cabinet; the subwoofer simply stands on the platform.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA subwoofer puts more energy into the floor than anything else in the system. The floor carries it through the room and sends part of it back into the box. IsoAcoustics designs the Aperta SUB so that energy is managed by isolators inside the frame, not by the floor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSized to Fit Between the Feet of a Typical Subwoofer\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFit, Load and Materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Aperta SUB carries up to 80 pounds. No minimum is published. An isolator loaded far under its rating never reaches its working range, so a very light subwoofer may sit better on ISO-PUCKs. A heavier cabinet steps up to the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-aperta-sub-xl-subwoofer-isolation-platform-black\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAperta SUB XL\u003c\/a\u003e. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e confirms the match.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe platform is 10.5 inches wide, 11.5 inches deep and 1.3 inches tall, with a sculpted aluminum frame. Its shape lets it sit under the cabinet between the subwoofer's own feet, so the feet are not in the way. IsoAcoustics tested the design at the National Research Council of Canada.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eFour carpet discs come in the box. On a hard floor the platform stands on its isolators. On carpet, the discs give the isolators a firm footing through the pile to the floor beneath, so the platform works the same way on either surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the Aperta SUB Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou have a subwoofer of up to 80 pounds on a hard floor\u003c\/strong\u003e — the platform decouples it in 1.3 inches of height\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou live in an apartment or upstairs room\u003c\/strong\u003e — IsoAcoustics designs the SUB to keep cabinet energy out of the floor that carries it next door\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour subwoofer sits on carpet\u003c\/strong\u003e — the four included discs give the platform a solid footing through the pile\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want a fix without tools or modifications\u003c\/strong\u003e — the subwoofer stands on the platform, so it goes in and out in a minute\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour subwoofer weighs more than 80 pounds\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-aperta-sub-xl-subwoofer-isolation-platform-black\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAperta SUB XL\u003c\/a\u003e carries 160 pounds\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do You Set It Up?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSet the platform where the subwoofer will stand, with the IsoAcoustics logo facing forward. On carpet, place the four discs under the platform's feet first. Lower the subwoofer onto the platform so its cabinet, not its feet, rests on the frame. Check that it sits level, then play.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat most Aperta SUB owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — get the tweeters to ear height before you isolate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/floor-carpet-protection-discs\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eFloor and carpet protection discs\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a firm footing on carpet or a soft floor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the next link in the chain after the speakers are settled\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speakers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeakers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the bookshelf and desktop models these are made to sit under\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOne platform per subwoofer. The Aperta SUB is sold singly with its four carpet discs, so order one for each subwoofer in the system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhich Aperta SUB fits my subwoofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eGo by weight and footprint: the Aperta SUB carries up to 80 pounds and measures 10.5 by 11.5 inches. The SUB XL carries 160 pounds at 14.5 by 16 inches. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e settles borderline cases.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill it work with a down-firing subwoofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics designs the Aperta SUB for front-firing and side-firing subwoofers. A down-firing driver needs room below the cabinet, so check the selector or ask us before you order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDoes it tilt or adjust in height?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Aperta SUB has no tilt or height adjustment. It is a fixed, low platform, 1.3 inches tall, made to sit flat under the cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics unboxes the Aperta SUB and shows how the platform and the carpet discs go under a subwoofer:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/ffMMpYWeflc\" title=\"IsoAcoustics Aperta Sub Unboxing - Isolation Stand for Subwoofers - IsoAcoustics\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, desktop speakers, or vibration control? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"IsoAcoustics","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45983322472621,"sku":"NEW-IAAPERSUB-BLK","price":169.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/IAAPERSUB_BLK_02-Large__33110.1721052905.1280.1280.jpg?v=1778094502"},{"product_id":"isoacoustics-aperta-speaker-stands-silver","title":"IsoAcoustics Aperta Speaker Stands - Silver","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Tilting Isolation Stand for Bookshelf Speakers up to 35 Pounds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe IsoAcoustics Aperta is sold as a pair, in black or silver, and each speaker takes one stand. It carries a bookshelf or desktop speaker of up to 35 pounds and tilts it up to 6.5 degrees up or down, so the tweeter can be aimed at your ears from a desk or a low shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA speaker on a desk or shelf drives energy into the surface, and the surface sends it back into the cabinet. IsoAcoustics designs the Aperta so that energy is managed by isolators in the top and bottom of the frame. The speaker rides on the isolators rather than on the desk.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eA Small Footprint That Carries Most Bookshelf Speakers\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFit, Load and Materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach Aperta stand carries up to 35 pounds. No minimum is published, but an isolator loaded far under its rating never reaches its working range, so a very small desktop speaker may be better served by pucks. Speakers heavier than 35 pounds step up to the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-aperta200-isolation-stands-with-tilt-adjustment\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAperta200\u003c\/a\u003e. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e confirms the match.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe stand is 6.1 inches wide, 7.5 inches deep and 3 inches tall, so it raises the speaker three inches. The frame is machined aluminum, finished in black or silver, with IsoAcoustics isolators set into the top and bottom sections. The speaker sits on the top frame; nothing is screwed to it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe tilt adjusts up to 6.5 degrees upward or downward. The Aperta is made for a desk, shelf, credenza or a floor stand. On a floor stand whose top plate is smaller than the stand, the Aperta Plates give it a full-size surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eRobert Deutsch heard the Aperta demonstrated for \u003cem\u003eStereophile\u003c\/em\u003e and reported “a general tightening of the bass and less smearing in the midrange, and even the treble.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eGary Galo reviewed the Aperta for \u003cem\u003eAudioXpress\u003c\/em\u003e and found that “Both the bass and midrange show improved clarity and definition” with the stands in place.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the Aperta Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour speakers sit on a desk or a low shelf\u003c\/strong\u003e — the tilt aims the tweeter at your ears instead of your chest\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou own bookshelf or desktop speakers of up to 35 pounds each\u003c\/strong\u003e — one Aperta per speaker carries them inside the working range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want the speaker off the surface without bolting anything\u003c\/strong\u003e — it simply sits on the top frame, so it comes off in seconds\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou have a floor stand with a small top plate\u003c\/strong\u003e — the Aperta Plates extend the surface so the stand sits flat\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour speakers weigh more than 35 pounds each\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-aperta200-isolation-stands-with-tilt-adjustment\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAperta200\u003c\/a\u003e carries 75 pounds a stand\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do You Set Them Up?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSet each stand where the speaker will go, with the IsoAcoustics logo facing forward. Place the speaker centered on the top frame. Adjust the tilt until the tweeter points at your listening position, then check that both stands are set the same. Sit down and listen.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat most Aperta owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — get the tweeters to ear height before you isolate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/floor-carpet-protection-discs\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eFloor and carpet protection discs\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a firm footing on carpet or a soft floor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the next link in the chain after the speakers are settled\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speakers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeakers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the bookshelf and desktop models these are made to sit under\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOne stand per speaker. The Aperta is sold as a pair, so one order covers a stereo pair. A center channel or a single desktop speaker needs one stand from the pair.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhich Aperta fits my speakers?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eGo by the weight and footprint of one speaker: Aperta up to 35 pounds, Aperta200 up to 75, Aperta 300 up to 60 for wide cabinets. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e settles borderline cases.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow does the tilt work?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach stand tilts up to 6.5 degrees upward or downward, so a speaker on a desk can point its tweeter up to seated ear height. Set both stands to the same angle.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill it sit on a floor stand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes, if the top plate is at least the stand's 6.1 by 7.5 inch footprint. For a smaller top plate, the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-aperta-plates-for-aperta-stands-pair\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAperta Plates\u003c\/a\u003e give the stand a full-size surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003esavagegeese tries the Aperta stands under desktop speakers and shows the tilt and the frame up close:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/rbY0FTq6wYA\" title=\"Tech Reviews | Aperta Speaker Stand Isolators | Isoacoustics - savagegeese\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, desktop speakers, or vibration control? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"IsoAcoustics","offers":[{"title":"Silver \/ New","offer_id":45983365562541,"sku":"NEW-IAAPERTA-SIL","price":229.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/IAAPERTA_SIL_01-Large__74448.1730358681.1280.1280_dfd53b37-15b8-4a69-8ec1-ca5b761ada66.jpg?v=1778094824"},{"product_id":"isoacoustics-orea-bordeaux-isolation-puck-each","title":"IsoAcoustics OREA Bordeaux Isolation Puck - Each","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Heavy-Duty OREA for Power Amplifiers and Big Turntables\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe IsoAcoustics OREA Bordeaux is sold singly. Each puck carries 32 pounds. Three or four support a power amp, a monoblock, a heavy turntable or a big integrated weighing between about 48 and 128 pounds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eHeavy gear both makes and receives vibration. A big transformer hums, the speakers shake the floor, and both reach the chassis through the shelf. IsoAcoustics designs the OREA to soak up that energy inside the puck rather than let it travel upward.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Top of the OREA Ladder, Rated by Load, Not by Quality\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFit, Load and Materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach Bordeaux carries up to 32 pounds. IsoAcoustics says to use at least three under a component, and three or four is typical. Three carry 96 pounds, four carry 128 and six carry 192. No minimum is published. A barely loaded puck never reaches its working range, so a 20-pound preamp belongs on the Indigo.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe housing is machined stainless steel with a bordeaux ring on the lower isolator. Each puck is 2.6 inches across and 1.4 inches tall, the largest in the family. Under a hot amplifier that height helps airflow, and it eats shelf clearance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe dished top grips a smooth chassis like a suction cup and holds textured surfaces by friction. The pucks are built for a rack shelf, an amp stand or the floor. For anything heavier than four pucks carry, the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e shows how many to add.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eStereophile\u003c\/em\u003e lists the OREA Bordeaux in its Recommended Components for 2025. The list is the magazine's twice-yearly roundup of gear its own reviewers have used and stand behind.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eArt Dudley placed OREA Bordeaux pucks under his turntable plinth for \u003cem\u003eStereophile\u003c\/em\u003e and wrote that the mandolin on a favorite record “had more body and an altogether richer timbral character.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the OREA Bordeaux Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou own a power amp or integrated of 48 to 128 pounds\u003c\/strong\u003e — three or four Bordeaux pucks carry it inside their working range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou run a heavy turntable\u003c\/strong\u003e — the pucks replace the plinth feet, and the 2.6-inch footprint gives a wide plinth a stable footing\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou have monoblocks on the floor or on stands\u003c\/strong\u003e — sold singly, so three under each amplifier with no set to split\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour amplifier runs hot\u003c\/strong\u003e — 1.4 inches of added height keeps air moving under the chassis on a closed shelf\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour component weighs less than about 48 pounds\u003c\/strong\u003e — the OREA Indigo, rated 16 pounds a puck, keeps a lighter amplifier inside its working range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do You Set Them Up?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSet three or four pucks where the chassis, not the stock feet, will land: two at the front and one behind, or one under each corner. Lower the amp and press so each flange seats. Under a speaker, face the logo forward. Level a turntable after the pucks are loaded. Load them and listen.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat most OREA Bordeaux owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/audio-racks\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAudio racks\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a rigid, level shelf gives the pucks a firm grip\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/power-conditioners\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003ePower conditioners\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — cleaner power for the gear you are isolating\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/isolation-feet-and-cones\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsolation feet and cones\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the other rungs for the rest of the rack\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eCables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the natural next upgrade for an isolated source\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThree is the minimum IsoAcoustics recommends under any component, and four is common. Three Bordeaux carry 96 pounds, four carry 128 and six carry 192. They are sold singly, so order that count.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhich OREA model fits my component?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eChoose by weight: Graphite 4 pounds a puck, Bronze 8, Indigo 16, Bordeaux 32. Overloaded or barely loaded, a puck sits outside its working range. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e settles borderline weights.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I use them under a floorstanding speaker?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. Face the IsoAcoustics logo forward, in line with the drivers, and confirm the count for the speaker's weight with the selector. For speakers that take screw-in feet, IsoAcoustics also makes the threaded GAIA.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much height does it add under my amplifier?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach Bordeaux is 1.4 inches tall and 2.6 inches across. It takes the place of the stock feet, so the net change is usually about an inch. Measure the gap above the amp first.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics shows how the four OREA models are sized, the Bordeaux being the heaviest rung, and how the pucks are placed under a component:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/GgJhIfecGBk\" title=\"IsoAcoustics OREA Series Overview. Isolators for Audio Components and Speakers. - IsoAcoustics\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about vibration control, rack setup, or turntable placement? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"IsoAcoustics","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45983365628077,"sku":"NEW-IAOBORD-SIN","price":89.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/IAOBORD_EA_FRONT-Large__47162.1731599868.1280.1280_1afb896d-8098-446b-842f-784e9d4fa3e1.jpg?v=1778133697"},{"product_id":"isoacoustics-aperta-sub-xl-subwoofer-isolation-platform-black","title":"IsoAcoustics Aperta SUB XL Subwoofer Isolation Platform - Black","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Large Subwoofer Platform, Rated to 160 Pounds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe IsoAcoustics Aperta SUB XL is sold singly, one platform with four carpet discs in the box. It sits under a large front-firing or side-firing subwoofer of up to 160 pounds and raises it 1.5 inches. Nothing is bolted to the cabinet; the subwoofer stands on the platform.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA big subwoofer puts more energy into the floor than anything else in the room. The floor carries it through the house and sends part of it back into the box. IsoAcoustics designs the Aperta SUB XL so that energy is managed by isolators inside the frame, not by the floor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eTwice the Load of the Aperta SUB for the Biggest Cabinets\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFit, Load and Materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Aperta SUB XL carries up to 160 pounds. No minimum is published. An isolator loaded far under its rating never reaches its working range, so a subwoofer under about 80 pounds belongs on the standard Aperta SUB. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e confirms the match for your cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe platform is 14.5 inches wide, 16 inches deep and 1.5 inches tall, with a sculpted aluminum frame. Its shape lets it sit under the cabinet between the subwoofer's own feet, so the feet are not in the way. Measure the base of your subwoofer against those figures before you order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eFour carpet discs come in the box. On a hard floor the platform stands on its isolators. On carpet, the discs give the isolators a firm footing through the pile to the floor beneath, so the platform works the same way on either surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the Aperta SUB XL Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou have a subwoofer of 80 to 160 pounds\u003c\/strong\u003e — the XL platform carries it inside the working range in 1.5 inches of height\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou run a big sub in a shared building\u003c\/strong\u003e — IsoAcoustics designs the platform to keep cabinet energy out of the floor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour subwoofer sits on carpet\u003c\/strong\u003e — the four included discs give the platform a solid footing through the pile\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want a fix without tools or modifications\u003c\/strong\u003e — the subwoofer stands on the platform, so it goes in and out in a minute\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour subwoofer weighs less than about 80 pounds\u003c\/strong\u003e — the Aperta SUB, rated 80 pounds, keeps a lighter cabinet inside its working range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do You Set It Up?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSet the platform where the subwoofer will stand, with the IsoAcoustics logo facing forward. On carpet, place the four discs under the platform's feet first. With a helper, lower the subwoofer onto the platform so its cabinet rests on the frame. Check that it sits level, then play.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat most Aperta SUB XL owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — get the tweeters to ear height before you isolate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/floor-carpet-protection-discs\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eFloor and carpet protection discs\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a firm footing on carpet or a soft floor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the next link in the chain after the speakers are settled\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speakers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeakers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the bookshelf and desktop models these are made to sit under\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOne platform per subwoofer. The Aperta SUB XL is sold singly with its four carpet discs, so order one for each subwoofer in the system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhich Aperta SUB fits my subwoofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eGo by weight and footprint: the Aperta SUB carries up to 80 pounds at 10.5 by 11.5 inches. The SUB XL carries 160 pounds at 14.5 by 16 inches. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e settles borderline cases.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill it work with a down-firing subwoofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics designs the Aperta SUB XL for front-firing and side-firing subwoofers. A down-firing driver needs room below the cabinet, so check the selector or ask us before you order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDoes it tilt or adjust in height?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe Aperta SUB XL has no tilt or height adjustment. It is a fixed, low platform, 1.5 inches tall, made to sit flat under the cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, desktop speakers, or vibration control? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"IsoAcoustics","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45983372968109,"sku":"NEW-IAAPESXL-BLK","price":219.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Demo","offer_id":45983373000877,"sku":"DEMO-IAAPESXL-BLK","price":179.37,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/IAAPERSUB_BLK_01-Large__45283.1720557943.1280.1280_f79452a2-9c07-4ae0-911e-50b52eb1f6eb.jpg?v=1778153700"},{"product_id":"isoacoustics-iso-155-isolation-stands-pair","title":"IsoAcoustics ISO-155 Isolation Stands - Pair","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Mid-Size ISO Stand for Nearfield Monitors up to 40 Pounds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe IsoAcoustics ISO-155 is sold as a pair, and each speaker takes one stand. It carries a nearfield monitor or bookshelf speaker of up to 40 pounds, raises it to one of two heights, and tilts it up to 6.5 degrees to aim the tweeter at the listener.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA monitor on a desk or console drives energy into the surface, and the surface returns it to the cabinet. IsoAcoustics designs the ISO stands with isolators in the top and bottom frames, so the speaker rides on the isolators instead of the desk.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSized for the Monitors Most Small Studios Own\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFit, Load and Materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach ISO-155 carries up to 40 pounds in the short setting and 35 pounds in the tall setting. No minimum is published, but an isolator loaded far under its rating never reaches its working range, so a 10-pound speaker belongs on the ISO-130. Heavier monitors step up to the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-iso-200-monitor-stands-pair\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eISO-200\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe footprint is 6.1 inches wide by 7.5 inches deep. With the short tubes the stand is 3 inches tall; with the long tubes, 8.2 inches. Tilt inserts angle the speaker up or down by up to 6.5 degrees, and IsoAcoustics counts 14 combinations of height and tilt.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe stand ships as a kit of frames, tubes and inserts and assembles by hand. It is made for a desk, console or shelf. On a floor stand with a small top plate, the Aperta Plates give the ISO-155 a full-size surface to sit on.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eChris Corfield reviewed the ISO-155 for \u003cem\u003eMusicRadar\u003c\/em\u003e and called them “a great example of specialist on-desk stands that provide the isolation and elevation needed to mix and master accurately.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the ISO-155 Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou run nearfield monitors of 20 to 40 pounds each\u003c\/strong\u003e — one ISO-155 per speaker carries them inside the working range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour monitors sit on a desk or console bridge\u003c\/strong\u003e — two heights and the tilt inserts bring the tweeter to ear level\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want the speaker off the surface without gluing or screwing\u003c\/strong\u003e — it sits on the top frame and lifts straight off\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou have a floor stand with a small top plate\u003c\/strong\u003e — the Aperta Plates extend the surface so the stand sits flat\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour monitors weigh more than 40 pounds each\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-iso-200-monitor-stands-pair\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eISO-200\u003c\/a\u003e carries 75 pounds a stand\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do You Set Them Up?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eChoose the short or long tubes, press them into the isolators in the bottom frame, and fit the top frame. Add the tilt inserts if the tweeter needs to point up or down. Set the stand where the speaker will go, logo forward, and center the speaker on the top frame. Sit down and listen.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat most ISO-155 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — get the tweeters to ear height before you isolate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/floor-carpet-protection-discs\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eFloor and carpet protection discs\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a firm footing on carpet or a soft floor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the next link in the chain after the speakers are settled\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speakers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeakers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the bookshelf and desktop models these are made to sit under\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOne stand per speaker. The ISO-155 is sold as a pair, so one order covers a stereo pair of monitors. A third speaker needs one more stand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhich ISO stand fits my speakers?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eGo by the weight and base of one speaker: ISO-130 up to 20 pounds, ISO-155 up to 40, ISO-200 up to 75. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e settles borderline cases.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow do the height and tilt adjust?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eShort tubes give 3 inches of height and long tubes 8.2 inches. The tilt inserts angle the stand up to 6.5 degrees up or down. In the tall setting the rating drops to 35 pounds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill it sit on a floor stand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes, if the top plate is at least 6.1 by 7.5 inches. For a smaller top plate, the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-aperta-plates-for-aperta-stands-pair\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAperta Plates\u003c\/a\u003e give the stand a full-size surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMichael Sorrentino sets up the ISO-155 under his studio monitors and compares them with the stands he used before:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/m9ssLdVpho8\" title=\"The TRUTH about IsoAcoustics ISO 155 Stands - Michael Sorrentino\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, desktop monitors, or vibration control? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"IsoAcoustics","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45983398297773,"sku":"NEW-IAISO155","price":135.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Demo","offer_id":45983398330541,"sku":"DEMO-IAISO155","price":109.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/IAISO155_01-Large__31197.1725992897.1280.1280_a3f8b4b8-f8c2-4ecb-b390-d2e20fb2fc4f.jpg?v=1778111786"},{"product_id":"isoacoustics-iso-200sub-acoustic-isolation-stand","title":"IsoAcoustics ISO-200Sub Acoustic Isolation Stand","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eA Fixed-Height Isolation Stand for Subwoofers up to 75 Pounds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe IsoAcoustics ISO-200Sub is sold singly, one stand per box. It sits under a subwoofer of up to 75 pounds and raises it 3.75 inches. There is no tilt. It is the ISO-200 frame built as a flat, fixed platform for a cabinet that fires forward or to the side.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA subwoofer puts more energy into the floor than anything else in the room, and the floor sends part of it back into the box. IsoAcoustics designs the ISO stands with isolators in the top and bottom frames, so the subwoofer rides on the isolators, not the floor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe ISO-200 Frame, Fixed Flat for a Subwoofer\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFit, Load and Materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach ISO-200Sub carries up to 75 pounds. No minimum is published, but an isolator loaded far under its rating never reaches its working range. For a heavier subwoofer, IsoAcoustics says two stands can sit side by side, with the weight spread evenly and neither over 75 pounds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe stand is 7.8 inches wide, 10 inches deep and 3.75 inches tall. It ships with the short tubes only and no tilt inserts, so it assembles one way and sits flat. Check that 3.75 inches of lift against a subwoofer that sits under a desk or in a cabinet bay.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIt assembles by hand from frames and tubes and is made for a hard floor, a stage or a studio floor. A subwoofer wider than the frame is fine as long as the cabinet is centered and the weight sits evenly on the top frame.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the ISO-200Sub Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou have a subwoofer of up to 75 pounds on a hard floor\u003c\/strong\u003e — one ISO-200Sub lifts it 3.75 inches onto its isolators\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour subwoofer sits in a studio or home theater\u003c\/strong\u003e — IsoAcoustics makes the stand for front-firing and side-firing cabinets in either setting\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want a fix without tools or modifications\u003c\/strong\u003e — the subwoofer stands on the top frame and lifts straight off\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou have a bigger subwoofer\u003c\/strong\u003e — two stands side by side carry up to 150 pounds when the weight is spread evenly\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want a lower, tilt-free platform\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-aperta-sub-subwoofer-isolation-platform-black\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAperta SUB\u003c\/a\u003e sits 1.3 inches tall and carries 80 pounds\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do You Set It Up?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePress the short tubes into the isolators in the bottom frame and fit the top frame. Set the stand where the subwoofer will go, with the IsoAcoustics logo facing forward. Lower the subwoofer onto the top frame, centered so the weight sits evenly. Check that it is level, then play.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat most ISO-200Sub owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — get the tweeters to ear height before you isolate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/floor-carpet-protection-discs\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eFloor and carpet protection discs\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a firm footing on carpet or a soft floor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the next link in the chain after the speakers are settled\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speakers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeakers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the bookshelf and desktop models these are made to sit under\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOne stand per subwoofer. The ISO-200Sub is sold singly. A subwoofer heavier than 75 pounds takes two stands side by side, with the cabinet centered across both.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan it tilt or change height?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe ISO-200Sub ships with short tubes only and no tilt inserts, so it is a fixed 3.75-inch platform. The ISO-200 speaker stand is the model with height and tilt adjustment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill it fit a wide subwoofer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe frame is 7.8 by 10 inches. A wider cabinet can sit on it as long as it is centered and stable. For a very large or heavy cabinet, use two stands.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhich surface is it made for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics makes the ISO stands for hard floors, stages and studio floors. On thick carpet the frame can rock, so a firm surface under the stand works best.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size: 1.25em; margin: 1.4em 0 0.35em 0; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.5em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003ePaul Morrison of IsoAcoustics runs through the ISO-Stand set-up, with tips for getting the install right first time:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/wqNBHKHQvY4\" title=\"How To Assemble IsoAcoustics ISO-Stands for Speakers and Studio Monitors\" style=\"border: 0; margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; display: block;\"\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, desktop monitors, or vibration control? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"IsoAcoustics","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45983399084205,"sku":"NEW-IAL8R200S","price":79.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/IAL8R200S_01-Large__38298.1725505669.1280.1280_49dba6ba-c161-4544-95eb-a9e3e8761192.jpg?v=1778112002"},{"product_id":"isoacoustics-aperta200-support-plates-pair","title":"IsoAcoustics Aperta200 Support Plates - Pair","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eA Wider Steel Plate for Aperta200 and ISO-200 Stands on Floor Stands\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe IsoAcoustics Aperta200 Support Plates are sold as a pair, one for each stand. They give an Aperta200 or ISO-200 isolation stand a full-size surface when the top of a floor stand or bracket is smaller than the stand's 7.8 by 10 inch footprint.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach plate is steel with a black powder-coat finish, 10.7 inches long, 8.6 inches wide and 0.12 inches thick. Strips of 3M double-sided tape are included, and the plates can also be drilled and bolted to the stand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSized for the Aperta200 and ISO-200 Footprint\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFit, Load and Materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe plate matches the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-aperta200-isolation-stands-with-tilt-adjustment\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAperta200\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-iso-200-monitor-stands-pair\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eISO-200\u003c\/a\u003e footprint with a margin on each side and adds about an eighth of an inch of height. The stands' weight ratings still apply. IsoAcoustics advises making sure the floor stand beneath is stable enough for the stand and a speaker of up to 75 pounds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do You Fit Them?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eClean the top of the floor stand and either tape the plate down with the supplied strips or drill and bolt it through. Center the Aperta200 or ISO-200 on the plate, then set the speaker on the stand and adjust the tilt.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOne plate per stand. The plates come as a pair, which covers a stereo pair of Aperta200 or ISO-200 stands.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo I need these on a shelf or console?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOnly when the surface under the stand is smaller than its footprint. On a console bridge, desk or full-width shelf the stand sits directly on the surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill they fit the smaller Aperta or ISO-155?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThose stands take the Aperta Plates, which are 8.25 by 6.85 inches. This pair fits the Aperta200 and ISO-200 only.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, floor types, or vibration control? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"IsoAcoustics","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45983409897645,"sku":"NEW-IAAPE200P","price":69.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/IAAPE200P_BLK_01-Large__37518.1725992957.1280.1280.jpg?v=1778113752"},{"product_id":"isoacoustics-iso-200-monitor-stands-pair","title":"IsoAcoustics ISO-200 Monitor Stands - Pair","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Large ISO Stand for Monitors up to 75 Pounds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe IsoAcoustics ISO-200 is sold as a pair, and each speaker takes one stand. It carries a large monitor or bookshelf speaker of up to 75 pounds, raises it to one of two heights, and tilts it up to 6.5 degrees to aim the tweeter at the listener.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA heavy monitor on a console or shelf drives real energy into the surface, and the surface returns it to the cabinet. IsoAcoustics designs the ISO stands with isolators in the top and bottom frames, so the speaker rides on the isolators instead of the shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Heaviest Load in the ISO Range, with Fourteen Ways to Aim It\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFit, Load and Materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach ISO-200 carries up to 75 pounds in the short setting and 60 pounds in the tall setting. No minimum is published, but an isolator loaded far under its rating never reaches its working range, so a 25-pound monitor belongs on the ISO-155. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e confirms the match.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe footprint is 7.8 inches wide by 10 inches deep. With the short tubes the stand is 3.75 inches tall; with the long tubes it is 8.5 inches. Tilt inserts angle the speaker up or down by up to 6.5 degrees, and IsoAcoustics counts 14 combinations of height and tilt.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe stand ships as a kit of frames, tubes and inserts and assembles by hand. It is made for a console bridge, shelf or floor stand. On a floor stand with a small top plate, the Aperta200 Support Plates give the ISO-200 a full-size surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWes Marshall reviewed the ISO-200 for \u003cem\u003eSoundStage! Xperience\u003c\/em\u003e and wrote: “They’re the only stands I’ve ever used that demonstrably and repeatably improve the openness and clarity of my system’s sound.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the ISO-200 Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou run large monitors or bookshelf speakers of 40 to 75 pounds each\u003c\/strong\u003e — one ISO-200 per speaker carries them inside the working range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour monitors sit on a console bridge\u003c\/strong\u003e — the low setting keeps them near the surface, and the tilt inserts aim the tweeter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want the speaker off the surface without gluing or screwing\u003c\/strong\u003e — it sits on the top frame and lifts straight off\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou have a floor stand with a small top plate\u003c\/strong\u003e — the Aperta200 Support Plates extend the surface so the stand sits flat\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour monitors weigh less than 40 pounds each\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-iso-155-isolation-stands-pair\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eISO-155\u003c\/a\u003e, rated 40 pounds a stand, keeps a lighter speaker inside its working range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do You Set Them Up?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eChoose the short or long tubes, press them into the isolators in the bottom frame, and fit the top frame. Add the tilt inserts if the tweeter needs to point up or down. Set the stand where the speaker will go, logo forward, and center the speaker on the top frame. Sit down and listen.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat most ISO-200 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — get the tweeters to ear height before you isolate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/floor-carpet-protection-discs\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eFloor and carpet protection discs\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a firm footing on carpet or a soft floor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the next link in the chain after the speakers are settled\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speakers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeakers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the bookshelf and desktop models these are made to sit under\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOne stand per speaker. The ISO-200 is sold as a pair, so one order covers a stereo pair of monitors. A third speaker needs one more stand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhich ISO stand fits my speakers?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eGo by the weight and base of one speaker: ISO-130 up to 20 pounds, ISO-155 up to 40, ISO-200 up to 75. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e settles borderline cases.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow do the height and tilt adjust?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eShort tubes give 3.75 inches of height and long tubes 8.5 inches. The tilt inserts angle the stand up to 6.5 degrees up or down. In the tall setting the rating drops to 60 pounds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill it sit on a floor stand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes, if the top plate is at least 7.8 by 10 inches. For a smaller top plate, the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-aperta200-support-plates-pair\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAperta200 Support Plates\u003c\/a\u003e give the stand a full-size surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size: 1.25em; margin: 1.4em 0 0.35em 0; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.5em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003ePaul Morrison of IsoAcoustics runs through the ISO-Stand set-up, with tips for getting the install right first time:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/wqNBHKHQvY4\" title=\"How To Assemble IsoAcoustics ISO-Stands for Speakers and Studio Monitors\" style=\"border: 0; margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; display: block;\"\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, desktop monitors, or vibration control? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"IsoAcoustics","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45983427854509,"sku":"NEW-IAISO200","price":194.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/IAISO200_02-Large__44231.1730359333.1280.1280.jpg?v=1778112009"},{"product_id":"isoacoustics-iso-puck-mini-set-of-8","title":"IsoAcoustics ISO PUCK mini - Set of 8","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eEight Small Pucks for Desktop Monitors and Compact Speakers\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe IsoAcoustics ISO-PUCK mini comes in a box of eight. Each puck carries up to 6 pounds. IsoAcoustics calls for at least three under every speaker, so one box covers a stereo pair with four pucks a side. Three carry 18 pounds and four carry 24.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA small speaker on a desk excites the desktop. The desktop pushes that energy back up into the cabinet. IsoAcoustics designs the ISO-PUCK mini to take that energy up inside the puck, so the speaker rides on the isolator rather than on the desk.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eScaled Down for the Speakers That Actually Sit on a Desk\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFit, Load and Materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach mini carries up to 6 pounds. Three under a speaker handle 18 pounds and four handle 24. IsoAcoustics says to stay 10 percent under those limits to allow for uneven weight. No minimum is published. A puck carrying far less than its rating never settles into its working range, and the mini is the lightest rung there is.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach puck is 1.7 inches across and 0.9 inches tall, so a monitor rises just under an inch. IsoAcoustics describes an upper flange that adheres to the underside of the cabinet and a lower isolator that anchors to the desk or shelf. The energy is managed in the core between them.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNothing is screwed or glued, so the pucks lift off and move with you. They are made for desks, shelves, consoles and meter bridges. Set each one with the logo facing forward, in line with the drivers. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e confirms the count for your speakers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eReviewing the mini for \u003cem\u003eSound On Sound\u003c\/em\u003e, Hugh Robjohns found that under small monitors it brings “an audible improvement in mid-range clarity, stereo focus and — probably most obviously — a tighter, snappier bass response.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the ISO-PUCK mini Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou run desktop monitors or compact speakers of 6 to 18 pounds each\u003c\/strong\u003e — three or four minis per speaker carry them inside the working range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want one box to do a stereo pair\u003c\/strong\u003e — eight pucks give four per side with nothing left to order\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour speakers sit on a desk beside a keyboard or a screen\u003c\/strong\u003e — under an inch of lift keeps the tweeters where they were\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou work in more than one room\u003c\/strong\u003e — the pucks lift off and pack flat, and give the same footing on the next desk\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour speakers weigh more than 24 pounds each\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-iso-puck-isolation-feet-pair\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eISO-PUCK\u003c\/a\u003e carries 20 pounds a puck\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do You Set Them Up?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSet four minis under each speaker at the corners, or three with two in front and one centered behind. Turn each so the logo faces forward. Lower the speaker onto them and press so the top discs seat. With three a side, two spares wait for the next speaker.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat most ISO-PUCK mini owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — get the tweeters to ear height before you isolate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/floor-carpet-protection-discs\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eFloor and carpet protection discs\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a firm footing on carpet or a soft floor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the next link in the chain after the speakers are settled\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speakers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeakers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the bookshelf and desktop models these are made to sit under\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics requires at least three pucks under each speaker, and four for a wide cabinet. One box of eight covers a stereo pair at four a side, or three a side with two spare.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhich ISO-PUCK model fits my speakers?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eChoose by weight per speaker: mini 6 pounds a puck, ISO-PUCK 20, ISO-PUCK 76 40. Stay 10 percent under the limit, and use the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e if a speaker sits near a line.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I use them under electronics?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. IsoAcoustics lists turntables, mixers and DJ gear among the uses. Under electronics the logo direction does not matter. Under a speaker, face it forward, in line with the drivers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much height does it add?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach mini is 0.9 inches tall and 1.7 inches across. The speaker sits on the pucks rather than on its own feet, so it rises just under an inch. Tweeter height barely changes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics runs through the three ISO-PUCK models, including the mini, and shows the pucks going under a pair of monitors:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/BJOSaC9pYtk\" title=\"IsoAcoustics ISO-PUCK Series - sound clarity and openness for studio monitors and speakers - IsoAcoustics\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about desktop speaker setup, studio monitors, or vibration control? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"IsoAcoustics","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45983427952813,"sku":"NEW-IAISPUCKM-8S","price":114.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/IAISPUCKM_8_01-Large__46632.1725591667.1280.1280.jpg?v=1778136216"},{"product_id":"isoacoustics-orea-graphite-isolation-puck-each","title":"IsoAcoustics OREA Graphite Isolation Puck - Each","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Smallest OREA, Sized for Streamers, DACs and Phono Stages\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe IsoAcoustics OREA Graphite is sold singly, one puck per order line. It is the lightest rung in the OREA family and carries 4 pounds each. Three or four suit a small streamer, DAC, phono stage or headphone amp of 16 pounds or less.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEvery component sits in a room full of energy. Bass from the speakers, footsteps and motor hum travel through the floor and shelf into the chassis. IsoAcoustics designs the OREA to soak up that energy inside the puck.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSized by Load, So Light Gear Gets a Puck That Actually Works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFit, Load and Materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach Graphite carries up to 4 pounds. IsoAcoustics says to use at least three under a component, and three or four is typical. Three carry 12 pounds and four carry 16. No minimum is published. A puck rated far above its load never settles into its working range, so match the rung to the weight.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe housing is machined stainless steel with a grey ring on the lower isolator. Each puck is 1.6 inches across and 1.1 inches tall, so it adds about an inch under a component. Check that clearance against the shelf above.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe dished top grips a smooth chassis like a suction cup. On textured metal it holds by friction, so nothing is glued or screwed. The pucks are made for a rack shelf, cabinet or desk. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e sizes the whole family by weight.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the OREA Graphite Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou run a streamer, DAC or phono stage under 16 pounds\u003c\/strong\u003e — three or four Graphites carry it inside their working range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour rack shelves are tight\u003c\/strong\u003e — 1.1 inches of added height keeps a stacked component clear of the shelf above\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want to isolate one piece at a time\u003c\/strong\u003e — sold singly, so you buy three or four with nothing left over\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou have a glass or granite shelf\u003c\/strong\u003e — the concave flange grips smooth surfaces, so a light component stays put\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour component weighs more than 16 pounds\u003c\/strong\u003e — step up to the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-orea-bronze-isolation-puck-each\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eOREA Bronze\u003c\/a\u003e, rated 8 pounds a puck\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do You Set Them Up?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSet three or four pucks where the chassis, not the stock feet, will land. Use two at the front and one at the back, or one per corner. Lower the unit onto them and press so the flanges seat. Under electronics the logo can face any way. Set them down, set the gear on top, and you are done.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat most OREA Graphite owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/audio-racks\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAudio racks\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a rigid, level shelf gives the pucks a firm grip\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/power-conditioners\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003ePower conditioners\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — cleaner power for the gear you are isolating\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/isolation-feet-and-cones\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsolation feet and cones\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the other rungs for the rest of the rack\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eCables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the natural next upgrade for an isolated source\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThree is the minimum IsoAcoustics recommends under any component, and four is common. Three Graphites carry 12 pounds and four carry 16. Pucks are sold singly, so order that count.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhich OREA model fits my component?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMatch the rung to the weight: Graphite 4 pounds a puck, Bronze 8, Indigo 16, Bordeaux 32. Too heavy overloads a puck; too light never compresses it. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e settles borderline weights.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much height does it add?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach Graphite is 1.1 inches tall and 1.6 inches across. It replaces the stock feet rather than stacking on them, so the net change is usually under an inch.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill the pucks stick to my component?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe dished top grips a smooth chassis like a suction cup and holds textured surfaces by friction. IsoAcoustics says the suction is not needed, and nothing is fixed to your gear.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics explains how the OREA range is sized by weight and shows the pucks going under a component. The Graphite is the smallest rung covered:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/GgJhIfecGBk\" title=\"IsoAcoustics OREA Series Overview. Isolators for Audio Components and Speakers. - IsoAcoustics\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about vibration control, rack setup, or turntable placement? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"IsoAcoustics","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45983428051117,"sku":"NEW-IAOGRAP-SIN","price":49.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/IAOGRAP_EA_01-Large__61600.1710524925.1280.1280_4a0c732b-918e-4faf-bde3-f69d85a2e56b.jpg?v=1778149407"},{"product_id":"isoacoustics-orea-bronze-isolation-puck-each","title":"IsoAcoustics OREA Bronze Isolation Puck - Each","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eEight Pounds a Puck, for CD Players, Preamps and Light Turntables\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe IsoAcoustics OREA Bronze is sold individually. Each puck carries up to 8 pounds. Three or four support a CD player, a preamplifier, a compact integrated amp or a light turntable weighing between about 12 and 32 pounds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA component never sits in silence. Bass from the speakers, footsteps on the floor and the hum of its own transformer all reach the chassis through the shelf. IsoAcoustics designs the OREA to hold that energy inside the isolator rather than pass it to the circuitry.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eA Load Rating in the Middle of the Range, Where Most Source Gear Lives\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFit, Load and Materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach Bronze carries up to 8 pounds. IsoAcoustics says to use at least three under a component, and three or four is typical. Three carry 24 pounds and four carry 32. No minimum is published, but a lightly loaded isolator never reaches its working range, so a 6-pound DAC belongs on the Graphite.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe housing is machined stainless steel with a bronze ring on the lower isolator. Each puck is 2 inches across and 1.1 inches tall, adding about an inch of height. On a crowded rack that inch decides whether the component clears the shelf above.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe concave upper flange grips a smooth chassis with a suction-cup effect and holds textured surfaces by friction. The pucks suit a rack shelf, a cabinet or a desk. Where the weight falls near a boundary, the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e picks the rung for you.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe Absolute Sound\u003c\/em\u003e gave the OREA and GAIA series a Golden Ear Award in 2020, and \u003cem\u003eStereophile\u003c\/em\u003e named the GAIA and OREA isolation feet its Accessory of 2019.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the OREA Bronze Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou own a CD player, preamp or DAC of 12 to 32 pounds\u003c\/strong\u003e — three or four Bronze pucks carry it inside their working range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou run a light turntable\u003c\/strong\u003e — the pucks take the place of the stock feet, and you re-level the platter once they are loaded\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want to buy by the piece\u003c\/strong\u003e — sold singly, so three for a small chassis or four for a wide one\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour shelf is glass or polished stone\u003c\/strong\u003e — the concave flange grips smooth surfaces, so the component stays where you set it\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour component weighs more than 32 pounds\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-orea-indigo-isolation-puck-each\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eOREA Indigo\u003c\/a\u003e carries 16 pounds a puck\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do You Set Them Up?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSet three or four pucks where the chassis itself will rest on them, two across the front and one at the rear, or one per corner. Lower the component and press lightly so each flange seats. Level a turntable once the pucks are loaded. Under electronics the logo can face any way. Set them down, load them, and listen.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat most OREA Bronze owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/audio-racks\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAudio racks\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a rigid, level shelf gives the pucks a firm grip\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/power-conditioners\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003ePower conditioners\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — cleaner power for the gear you are isolating\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/isolation-feet-and-cones\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsolation feet and cones\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the other rungs for the rest of the rack\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eCables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the natural next upgrade for an isolated source\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThree is the minimum IsoAcoustics recommends under any component, and four is common. Three Bronze pucks carry 24 pounds and four carry 32. They are sold singly, so order that count.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhich OREA model fits my component?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMatch the rung to the load: Graphite 4 pounds a puck, Bronze 8, Indigo 16, Bordeaux 32. Too heavy overloads a puck; too light never compresses it. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e settles borderline weights.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill it fit under my component on the shelf?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach Bronze is 1.1 inches tall and 2 inches across. It takes the place of the stock feet, so the net height change is usually under an inch. Measure the clearance above first.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat is the puck made of, and does it need the suction?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA machined stainless steel housing around an isolator tuned to the load. The dished top grips smooth surfaces like a suction cup, but IsoAcoustics says that grip is not required; textured surfaces hold by friction.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics runs through the four OREA models, including the Bronze, and demonstrates placing the pucks under a component:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/GgJhIfecGBk\" title=\"IsoAcoustics OREA Series Overview. Isolators for Audio Components and Speakers. - IsoAcoustics\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about vibration control, rack setup, or turntable placement? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"IsoAcoustics","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45983481397421,"sku":"NEW-IAOBRON-SIN","price":59.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Demo","offer_id":45983481430189,"sku":"DEMO-IAOBRON-EA","price":48.37,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/IAOBRON_1-EA-Large__17434.1725992992.1280.1280_62321b91-1efc-4e68-a74f-fdcbb04b93b8.jpg?v=1778115172"},{"product_id":"isoacoustics-orea-indigo-isolation-puck-each","title":"IsoAcoustics OREA Indigo Isolation Puck - Each","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Mid-Weight OREA for Integrated Amplifiers and Turntables\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe IsoAcoustics OREA Indigo is sold singly. Each puck is rated for 16 pounds. Three or four carry an integrated amp, a stereo receiver, a larger turntable or a tube preamp weighing between roughly 24 and 64 pounds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eVibration is part of every listening room. Speaker energy, footfall and transformer hum pass through the floor and the shelf and enter the chassis through its feet. IsoAcoustics designs the OREA to soak up that energy inside the puck rather than pass it upward.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eRated for Amplifier Weight Without Amplifier-Sized Height\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFit, Load and Materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach Indigo carries up to 16 pounds. IsoAcoustics says to use at least three under a component, and three or four is typical. Three carry 48 pounds and four carry 64. No minimum is published. A puck carrying far less than its rating never settles into its working range, so a 15-pound CD player belongs on the Bronze.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe housing is machined stainless steel with an indigo ring on the lower isolator. Each puck is 2.3 inches across and 1.3 inches tall. It adds about an inch and a quarter under an amp, so allow for that on a shelf that is already close.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe dished top grips a smooth chassis like a suction cup and holds textured surfaces by friction. The pucks are made for rack shelves, cabinets and desks. For a weight near a line, the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e chooses the rung.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eStereophile\u003c\/em\u003e lists the OREA Indigo in its Recommended Components for 2025. The list is the magazine's twice-yearly roundup of gear its own reviewers have used and stand behind.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eReviewing the Indigo for \u003cem\u003eHiFi Pig\u003c\/em\u003e, Dan Worth wrote that the pucks “increase focus, precision and an essential tonal realism” under his components.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the OREA Indigo Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou own an integrated amp or receiver of 24 to 64 pounds\u003c\/strong\u003e — three or four Indigos carry it inside their working range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour turntable is on the heavy side\u003c\/strong\u003e — a 30-pound plinth sits on three Indigos in place of its stock feet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou are isolating a tube preamp\u003c\/strong\u003e — 1.3 inches of height leaves air moving around the chassis on an open shelf\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want to buy exactly what you need\u003c\/strong\u003e — sold singly, so three or four with no set to split\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour amplifier weighs more than 64 pounds\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-orea-bordeaux-isolation-puck-each\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eOREA Bordeaux\u003c\/a\u003e carries 32 pounds a puck\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do You Set Them Up?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePlace three or four pucks where the chassis will bear on them, two in front and one behind, or one per corner for a wide amp. Lower the component and press so each flange seats. Re-level a turntable once loaded. Under electronics the logo may face any direction. Set them down, set the gear on top, and play.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat most OREA Indigo owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/audio-racks\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAudio racks\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a rigid, level shelf gives the pucks a firm grip\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/power-conditioners\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003ePower conditioners\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — cleaner power for the gear you are isolating\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/isolation-feet-and-cones\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsolation feet and cones\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the other rungs for the rest of the rack\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eCables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the natural next upgrade for an isolated source\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThree is the minimum IsoAcoustics recommends under any component, and four is common. Three Indigos carry 48 pounds and four carry 64. They are sold singly, so order that count.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhich OREA model fits my component?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eChoose by weight: Graphite 4 pounds a puck, Bronze 8, Indigo 16, Bordeaux 32. Too heavy or too light takes a puck out of its working range. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e settles borderline weights.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much height does it add on my rack?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach Indigo is 1.3 inches tall and 2.3 inches across. It replaces the stock feet rather than sitting under them, so the net change is usually about an inch.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDoes it need a smooth surface to grip?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe dished top grips smooth metal like a suction cup and holds textured or painted surfaces by friction. IsoAcoustics says the suction is not needed, and nothing is fixed to your gear.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics explains how to choose an OREA model by weight, with the Indigo among the four shown, and shows how the pucks go in:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/GgJhIfecGBk\" title=\"IsoAcoustics OREA Series Overview. Isolators for Audio Components and Speakers. - IsoAcoustics\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about vibration control, rack setup, or turntable placement? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"IsoAcoustics","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45983481495725,"sku":"NEW-IAOINDI-SIN","price":69.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/IAOINDI_EA_FRONT-Large__42245.1731599718.1280.1280_d8a46901-3549-448d-8074-97fa294deaea.jpg?v=1778136477"},{"product_id":"isoacoustics-aperta200-isolation-stands-with-tilt-adjustment","title":"IsoAcoustics Aperta200 Isolation Stands with Tilt Adjustment","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Larger Aperta for Speakers up to 75 Pounds, with Marked Tilt\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe IsoAcoustics Aperta200 is sold as a pair, in black or silver, and each speaker takes one stand. It carries a bookshelf speaker or studio monitor of up to 75 pounds and tilts it up to 6.5 degrees, with graduated markings so both stands can be set to the same angle.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA heavy monitor on a console or shelf puts real energy into the surface, and the surface returns it to the cabinet. IsoAcoustics designs the Aperta200 so that energy is managed by isolators in the top and bottom of the frame. The speaker rides on the isolators rather than on the shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eTwice the Load of the Aperta, in a Stand Still Under Four Inches Tall\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFit, Load and Materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach Aperta200 carries up to 75 pounds. No minimum is published, but an isolator loaded far under its rating never reaches its working range, so a 15-pound speaker sits better on the Aperta. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e confirms the match for your speaker.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe stand is 7.8 inches wide, 10 inches deep and 3.5 inches tall, so it raises the speaker three and a half inches. The frame is solid aluminum, finished in black or silver, with IsoAcoustics isolators in the top and bottom sections. The speaker sits on the top frame; nothing is fastened to it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe tilt adjusts up to 6.5 degrees up or down, with gradation marks to repeat the setting on the second stand. It is made for a console, shelf, credenza or floor stand. On a small top plate, the Aperta200 Support Plates give it a full surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eBarry Rudolph tested the Aperta200 in his control room for \u003cem\u003eMusic Connection\u003c\/em\u003e: “The Aperta 200s are winners and I highly recommend them for any project studio, stereo or home theatre”.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the Aperta200 Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou own bookshelf speakers or monitors of 35 to 75 pounds each\u003c\/strong\u003e — one Aperta200 per speaker carries them inside the working range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour speakers sit on a console bridge or a low shelf\u003c\/strong\u003e — the tilt aims the tweeter at your ears, and the marks let you match both sides\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want the speaker off the surface without bolting anything\u003c\/strong\u003e — it sits on the top frame and lifts off in seconds\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou have a floor stand with a small top plate\u003c\/strong\u003e — the Aperta200 Support Plates extend the surface so the stand sits flat\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour speakers weigh less than 35 pounds each\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-aperta-speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAperta\u003c\/a\u003e, rated 35 pounds a stand, keeps a lighter speaker inside its working range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do You Set Them Up?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSet each stand where the speaker will go, logo facing forward. Place the speaker centered on the top frame. Adjust the tilt until the tweeter points at your listening position and read the mark, then set the second stand to the same mark. Sit down and listen.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat most Aperta200 owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — get the tweeters to ear height before you isolate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/floor-carpet-protection-discs\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eFloor and carpet protection discs\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a firm footing on carpet or a soft floor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the next link in the chain after the speakers are settled\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speakers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeakers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the bookshelf and desktop models these are made to sit under\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOne stand per speaker. The Aperta200 is sold as a pair, so one order covers a stereo pair. A single center speaker or monitor needs one stand from the pair.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhich Aperta fits my speakers?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eGo by the weight and footprint of one speaker: Aperta up to 35 pounds, Aperta200 up to 75, Aperta 300 up to 60 for wide cabinets. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e settles borderline cases.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow does the tilt adjustment work?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach stand tilts up to 6.5 degrees upward or downward, and gradation marks show the setting. Set one stand by ear, then match the second to the same mark.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill it sit on a floor stand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes, if the top plate is at least the stand's 7.8 by 10 inch footprint. For a smaller top plate, the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-aperta200-support-plates-pair\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAperta200 Support Plates\u003c\/a\u003e give the stand a full-size surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size: 1.25em; margin: 1.4em 0 0.35em 0; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.5em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics unboxes the Aperta stands and demonstrates the tilt adjustment across the three sizes:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/qdQZ7tG1RCA\" title=\"IsoAcoustics Aperta Series Speaker Isolation Stand Unboxing Video\" style=\"border: 0; margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; display: block;\"\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, desktop speakers, or vibration control? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"IsoAcoustics","offers":[{"title":"Silver \/ New","offer_id":45982188175533,"sku":"NEW-IAPERTA2-SIL","price":289.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Silver \/ Demo","offer_id":45982188208301,"sku":"DEMO-IAPERTA2-SIL","price":189.37,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Black \/ New","offer_id":47280625090733,"sku":"NEW-IAPERTA2-BLK","price":289.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/IAPERTA2_1-SIL-Large__29761.1730359522.1280.1280_6b26697d-ad50-4a41-9855-29f998a1d5d3.jpg?v=1778094830"},{"product_id":"isoacoustics-delos-isolation-platform","title":"IsoAcoustics DELOS Isolation Platform","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eA Butcher-Block Isolation Platform for Turntables up to 100 Pounds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe IsoAcoustics DELOS is sold singly, one platform per box, in maple or walnut, two sizes and two thicknesses. It is a solid hardwood butcher block with IsoAcoustics isolators fastened into its underside, made to carry a turntable or tube amplifier of up to 100 pounds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA turntable stylus reads movements far smaller than the footsteps, speaker energy and motor hum that travel through a shelf. IsoAcoustics designs the DELOS to combine the mass of a thick block with its isolators, so the turntable rides on the isolators rather than on the shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEvery option here carries the same isolation design. The choice comes down to the footprint your turntable needs, the weight it puts on the block, and whether maple or walnut suits the room.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFour Sizes, Two Woods, One Rule: Match the Block to the Weight\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFit, Load and Materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe 18 by 15 inch block has four isolators and carries 65 pounds at 1.75 inches thick or 55 pounds at 3 inches. The 22 by 16 inch block has six isolators and carries 100 pounds at 1.75 inches or 90 pounds at 3 inches. The thicker block weighs more itself, which is why its rating is lower.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNo minimum is published, but an isolator loaded far under its rating never reaches its working range, so a 20-pound turntable sits better on the zaZen. Add the block's thickness to your turntable's height when checking a rack shelf, and allow width for an outboard motor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMaple has a light amber color and a Janka hardness of 1450. Walnut is dark brown with visible grain and a Janka hardness of 1100. IsoAcoustics says both woods perform the same, so the choice is appearance. The isolators are recessed into the block and fastened to it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eJason Thorpe reviewed the walnut 22 by 16 inch DELOS for \u003cem\u003eSoundStage! Ultra\u003c\/em\u003e under his VPI turntable and concluded: “The Delos provides real improvements for a reasonable price.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePaul Rigby tried both sizes for \u003cem\u003eThe Audiophile Man\u003c\/em\u003e and wrote of the smaller block, “I found improvements wherever I used it”, with the biggest change under his preamplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the DELOS Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou own a turntable of 40 to 100 pounds\u003c\/strong\u003e — the four blocks cover that range, and the selector names the one for your weight\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour turntable has an outboard motor\u003c\/strong\u003e — the 22 by 16 inch block gives the motor and the plinth one level, isolated surface\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou run a heavy tube amplifier on a rack\u003c\/strong\u003e — the block carries the chassis and its feet on a single isolated platform\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want the platform to read as furniture\u003c\/strong\u003e — solid maple or walnut, finished as a butcher block, in two thicknesses\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour turntable weighs less than 40 pounds\u003c\/strong\u003e — the zaZen platforms, rated 25 and 40 pounds, keep a lighter deck inside its working range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do You Set It Up?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eClear the shelf and set the DELOS where the turntable will stand. Check that it sits level, since the isolators need even loading. Lower the turntable onto the block, centered, with its own feet on the wood. Re-level the turntable if it has adjustable feet. Cue a record and listen.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat most DELOS owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/turntables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eTurntables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the component that gains most from a still, level base\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/turntable-accessories\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eTurntable accessories\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — levels, mats and clamps for the same setup\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/phono-preamplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003ePhono preamplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the next component in the vinyl chain\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/record-cleaning-accessories\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eRecord cleaning accessories\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a clean groove is the other half of quiet playback\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOne platform per component. The DELOS is sold singly, so order one for the turntable and another for any other component you want to isolate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhich DELOS fits my turntable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eGo by footprint and weight. The 18 by 15 inch block carries 65 pounds at 1.75 inches thick or 55 at 3 inches. The 22 by 16 inch block carries 100 or 90 pounds. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e settles borderline cases.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy does the thicker block carry less?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe 3-inch block is heavier than the 1.75-inch block, and that extra wood loads the same isolators. IsoAcoustics rates the thicker version 10 pounds lower for that reason.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eIs maple better than walnut?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics says the two woods give the same isolation performance. Maple is lighter in color and harder; walnut is darker with more visible grain. Choose the one that suits your rack.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill it fit my turntable and motor?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMeasure the plinth and any outboard motor together. The 18 by 15 inch block suits most single-chassis turntables; a separate motor or a wide plinth usually needs the 22 by 16 inch block.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSee the IsoAcoustics DELOS platform unboxed and examined in both hardwood finishes:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/F6Fu-cwy8U4\" title=\"Unboxing the IsoAcoustics Delos: Isolation Meets Elegance\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSee the DELOS platform explained, sized, and compared with IsoAcoustics’ lighter-duty zaZen platform:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/Fd17qvVsaPM\" title=\"IsoAcoustics zaZen vs Delos Isolation Base Platforms for high end audio\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about turntable setup, rack placement, or vibration control? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"IsoAcoustics","offers":[{"title":"Maple \/ 18\" x 15\" x 1.75\" \/ New","offer_id":45981451354285,"sku":"NEW-IADELOS-1815M1-MAP","price":439.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Maple \/ 18\" x 15\" x 3\" \/ New","offer_id":45981858365613,"sku":"NEW-IADELOS-1815M2-MAP","price":549.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Maple \/ 22\" x 16\" x 1.75\" \/ New","offer_id":45983020023981,"sku":"NEW-IADELOS-2216M1-MAP","price":659.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Walnut \/ 18\" x 15\" x 1.75\" \/ New","offer_id":45982768038061,"sku":"NEW-IADELOS-1815W1-WAL","price":659.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Walnut \/ 18\" x 15\" x 3\" \/ New","offer_id":45983234490541,"sku":"NEW-IADELOS-1815W2-WAL","price":769.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Walnut \/ 22\" x 16\" x 1.75\" \/ New","offer_id":45982085087405,"sku":"NEW-IADELOS-2216W1-WAL","price":879.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Standard \/ 22\" x 16\" x 3\" \/ New","offer_id":45982181261485,"sku":"NEW-IADELOS-2216W2","price":989.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/IADELOS_1815M1_01-Large__00761.1725894726.1280.1280_5b7b81b2-c1a0-495a-ace7-f3f6039ad728.jpg?v=1778142679"},{"product_id":"isoacoustics-gaia-i-speaker-isolators","title":"IsoAcoustics GAIA I Speaker Isolators","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThreaded Isolation Feet for Floorstanders up to 220 Pounds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe IsoAcoustics GAIA I is the largest of the three original GAIA isolators. It is sold here singly and as a set of four, and every speaker takes four. A set carries a floorstanding speaker or subwoofer of up to 220 pounds. The feet screw into the same inserts the factory spikes came out of.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA floorstander drives its own energy into the floor, and the floor sends it straight back up into the box. IsoAcoustics designs the GAIA to manage that energy inside the foot. The housing is fixed to the speaker, and only the lower isolator touches the floor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eMade for the Heaviest Speakers Still Standing on Spikes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFit, Load and Materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA set of four GAIA I carries 220 pounds, so each foot handles 55. No minimum is published. A foot carrying far less than its rating never settles into its working range. A 90-pound speaker belongs on the GAIA II and a 60-pound speaker on the GAIA III. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e sorts this by weight.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach GAIA I is 2.5 inches across and 1.9 inches tall, in a machined dark chrome metal housing. It replaces the spike or foot rather than sitting under it. The change in speaker height depends on what came out. Three thread adaptors are included: M8-1.25, M12-1.25 and 1\/4 inch-20.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIf your speaker uses another thread, IsoAcoustics supplies other sizes. Its \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/isoacoustics.com\/home-audio-isolation-products\/gaia-series\/gaia-thread-sizes\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eGAIA thread-size guide\u003c\/a\u003e explains how to measure. The lower isolator is made to grip a hard floor. On thick carpet, the matching carpet discs give it a solid surface to stand on.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eRobert Deutsch tried a GAIA I set under his Monitor Audio speakers for \u003cem\u003eStereophile\u003c\/em\u003e. He found that “instruments and voices were more precisely defined on the soundstage, which itself was wider and higher.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eTheo Nicolakis ran GAIA I under his own speakers for \u003cem\u003eAudioholics\u003c\/em\u003e. He wrote: “In every instance the GAIA isolators improved the top to bottom performance of my two reference setups.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eStereophile\u003c\/em\u003e lists the GAIA I in its Recommended Components for 2025, and it named the GAIA and OREA isolation feet its Accessory of 2019.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the GAIA I Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou own floorstanders of 120 to 220 pounds each\u003c\/strong\u003e — four GAIA I per speaker carry them inside the working range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour speakers have threaded spike inserts\u003c\/strong\u003e — the housing screws into the cabinet, so the foot moves with the speaker\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour floor is hardwood, tile or concrete\u003c\/strong\u003e — the lower isolator grips a hard surface without spikes marking it\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou have a large subwoofer\u003c\/strong\u003e — IsoAcoustics rates the GAIA I for subwoofers up to 220 pounds as well as speakers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour speakers weigh less than 120 pounds each\u003c\/strong\u003e — the GAIA II, rated 120 pounds a set, keeps a lighter cabinet inside its working range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do You Set Them Up?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eUnscrew the factory spikes and match the thread. One side of the adaptor goes into the speaker and the other into the GAIA housing. Thread each stud in at least four full turns. Turn the logo to face your seat, then tighten the locking nut against the base of the speaker.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLift the speaker into place rather than sliding it, since the lower isolators grip the floor. On thick carpet, set a carpet disc under each foot. Level the cabinet, check that the logos still face forward, and play.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat most GAIA I owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — get the tweeters to ear height before you isolate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/floor-carpet-protection-discs\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eFloor and carpet protection discs\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a firm footing on carpet or a soft floor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the next link in the chain after the speakers are settled\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speakers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeakers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the bookshelf and desktop models these are made to sit under\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eFour per speaker, one at each corner, matching the spikes they replace. The GAIA I is sold singly and as a set of four. Order one set per speaker, or eight for a stereo pair.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhich GAIA fits my speakers?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eGo by the weight of one speaker: GAIA III up to 70 pounds, GAIA II up to 120, GAIA I up to 220. Heavier cabinets take the GAIA Titan. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e settles borderline weights.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill they fit my speaker's threads?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAdaptors for M8-1.25, M12-1.25 and 1\/4 inch-20 come in the box. If your speaker uses another size, IsoAcoustics supplies other adaptors. Its thread-size guide shows how to measure the insert.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I use them on carpet?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. On low pile the lower isolator grips through the carpet. On thicker carpet or an underpad, IsoAcoustics recommends its \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-gaia-i-carpet-spikes-set-of-4\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eGAIA I carpet spikes\u003c\/a\u003e, which give each foot a solid surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much height do they add?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach GAIA I stands 1.9 inches tall. It replaces the spike or foot rather than stacking on it, so the net change depends on the spike that came out. Measure before you order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eStreaky, a UK mixing engineer, fits GAIA I to his speakers and compares the result with the factory spikes:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/k3ExWnCN5kU\" title=\"DOES SPEAKER ISOLATION WORK? - Isoacoustic Gaia 1 - Streaky\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, floor types, or vibration control? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"IsoAcoustics","offers":[{"title":"4 Set \/ New","offer_id":45981152444589,"sku":"NEW-IAGAIAI-4S","price":569.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Each \/ New","offer_id":45981548019885,"sku":"NEW-IAGAIAI-1-EA","price":169.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Each \/ Demo","offer_id":45981548052653,"sku":"DEMO-IAGAIAI-1-EA","price":124.37,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/IAGAIAI_1-4-Large__87357.1731599625.1280.1280_116c41be-130b-4db5-a954-ae89b3307268.jpg?v=1778145312"},{"product_id":"isoacoustics-aperta-speaker-stands","title":"IsoAcoustics Aperta Speaker Stands","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Tilting Isolation Stand for Bookshelf Speakers up to 35 Pounds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe IsoAcoustics Aperta is sold as a pair, in black or silver, and each speaker takes one stand. It carries a bookshelf or desktop speaker of up to 35 pounds and tilts it up to 6.5 degrees up or down, so the tweeter can be aimed at your ears from a desk or a low shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA speaker on a desk or shelf drives energy into the surface, and the surface sends it back into the cabinet. IsoAcoustics designs the Aperta so that energy is managed by isolators in the top and bottom of the frame. The speaker rides on the isolators rather than on the desk.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eA Small Footprint That Carries Most Bookshelf Speakers\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFit, Load and Materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach Aperta stand carries up to 35 pounds. No minimum is published, but an isolator loaded far under its rating never reaches its working range, so a very small desktop speaker may be better served by pucks. Speakers heavier than 35 pounds step up to the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-aperta200-isolation-stands-with-tilt-adjustment\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAperta200\u003c\/a\u003e. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e confirms the match.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe stand is 6.1 inches wide, 7.5 inches deep and 3 inches tall, so it raises the speaker three inches. The frame is machined aluminum, finished in black or silver, with IsoAcoustics isolators set into the top and bottom sections. The speaker sits on the top frame; nothing is screwed to it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe tilt adjusts up to 6.5 degrees upward or downward. The Aperta is made for a desk, shelf, credenza or a floor stand. On a floor stand whose top plate is smaller than the stand, the Aperta Plates give it a full-size surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eRobert Deutsch heard the Aperta demonstrated for \u003cem\u003eStereophile\u003c\/em\u003e and reported “a general tightening of the bass and less smearing in the midrange, and even the treble.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eGary Galo reviewed the Aperta for \u003cem\u003eAudioXpress\u003c\/em\u003e and found that “Both the bass and midrange show improved clarity and definition” with the stands in place.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the Aperta Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour speakers sit on a desk or a low shelf\u003c\/strong\u003e — the tilt aims the tweeter at your ears instead of your chest\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou own bookshelf or desktop speakers of up to 35 pounds each\u003c\/strong\u003e — one Aperta per speaker carries them inside the working range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want the speaker off the surface without bolting anything\u003c\/strong\u003e — it simply sits on the top frame, so it comes off in seconds\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou have a floor stand with a small top plate\u003c\/strong\u003e — the Aperta Plates extend the surface so the stand sits flat\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour speakers weigh more than 35 pounds each\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-aperta200-isolation-stands-with-tilt-adjustment\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAperta200\u003c\/a\u003e carries 75 pounds a stand\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do You Set Them Up?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSet each stand where the speaker will go, with the IsoAcoustics logo facing forward. Place the speaker centered on the top frame. Adjust the tilt until the tweeter points at your listening position, then check that both stands are set the same. Sit down and listen.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat most Aperta owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — get the tweeters to ear height before you isolate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/floor-carpet-protection-discs\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eFloor and carpet protection discs\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a firm footing on carpet or a soft floor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the next link in the chain after the speakers are settled\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speakers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeakers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the bookshelf and desktop models these are made to sit under\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOne stand per speaker. The Aperta is sold as a pair, so one order covers a stereo pair. A center channel or a single desktop speaker needs one stand from the pair.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhich Aperta fits my speakers?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eGo by the weight and footprint of one speaker: Aperta up to 35 pounds, Aperta200 up to 75, Aperta 300 up to 60 for wide cabinets. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e settles borderline cases.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow does the tilt work?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach stand tilts up to 6.5 degrees upward or downward, so a speaker on a desk can point its tweeter up to seated ear height. Set both stands to the same angle.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill it sit on a floor stand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes, if the top plate is at least the stand's 6.1 by 7.5 inch footprint. For a smaller top plate, the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-aperta-plates-for-aperta-stands-pair\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAperta Plates\u003c\/a\u003e give the stand a full-size surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003esavagegeese tries the Aperta stands under desktop speakers and shows the tilt and the frame up close:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/rbY0FTq6wYA\" title=\"Tech Reviews | Aperta Speaker Stand Isolators | Isoacoustics - savagegeese\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, desktop speakers, or vibration control? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"IsoAcoustics","offers":[{"title":"Black \/ New","offer_id":45981960569005,"sku":"NEW-IAAPERTA-BLK-PR","price":229.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Silver \/ New","offer_id":45983365562541,"sku":"NEW-IAAPERTA-SIL","price":229.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/IAAPERTA_BLK_01-Large__86825.1715953377.1280.1280_3e277d9e-6c8f-4fbe-8762-728702b3c629.jpg?v=1778094821"},{"product_id":"isoacoustics-gaia-ii-speaker-isolator","title":"IsoAcoustics GAIA II Speaker Isolator","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Mid-Size GAIA for Floorstanders up to 120 Pounds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe IsoAcoustics GAIA II is the middle model of the original GAIA range. It is sold here singly and as a set of four, and each speaker takes four. A set carries a floorstanding speaker or subwoofer of up to 120 pounds. The feet thread into the inserts the factory spikes came out of.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEvery floorstander pushes energy into the floor, and the floor pushes it back into the cabinet. IsoAcoustics designs the GAIA to manage that energy inside the foot. The housing is fixed to the speaker, and only the lower isolator touches the floor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSized for the Floorstanders Most Living Rooms Actually Hold\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFit, Load and Materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA set of four GAIA II carries 120 pounds, so each foot handles 30. No minimum is published. A foot carrying far less than its rating never settles into its working range. A 60-pound speaker belongs on the GAIA III and a 150-pound speaker on the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-gaia-i-speaker-isolators\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eGAIA I\u003c\/a\u003e. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e sorts this by weight.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach GAIA II is 2 inches across and 1.7 inches tall, in a machined dark chrome metal housing. It replaces the spike or foot rather than sitting under it. The change in height depends on what came out. Three thread adaptors are included: M6-1.0, M8-1.25 and 1\/4 inch-20.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIf your speaker uses another thread, IsoAcoustics supplies other sizes. Its \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/isoacoustics.com\/home-audio-isolation-products\/gaia-series\/gaia-thread-sizes\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eGAIA thread-size guide\u003c\/a\u003e explains how to measure. The lower isolator is made to grip a hard floor. On thick carpet, the matching carpet discs give it a solid surface to stand on.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eBob Barrett ran GAIA II under his speakers for \u003cem\u003eHomeTheaterReview\u003c\/em\u003e. He wrote: “With every track, I consistently heard tighter bass and lower midrange, with greater focus and depth.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eCarlo Lo Rasso reviewed the GAIA II for \u003cem\u003eSecrets of Home Theater and High Fidelity\u003c\/em\u003e. He found them “a noticeable and positive improvement in the sonic performance of the Revel F228Be.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eHi-Fi Choice\u003c\/em\u003e gave the GAIA II a five-star review in 2017, and \u003cem\u003eStereophile\u003c\/em\u003e named the GAIA and OREA isolation feet its Accessory of 2019.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the GAIA II Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou own floorstanders of 70 to 120 pounds each\u003c\/strong\u003e — four GAIA II per speaker carry them inside the working range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour speakers have threaded spike inserts\u003c\/strong\u003e — the housing screws into the cabinet, so the foot moves with the speaker\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour floor is hardwood, tile or laminate\u003c\/strong\u003e — the lower isolator grips a hard surface without spikes marking it\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou run a mid-size subwoofer\u003c\/strong\u003e — IsoAcoustics rates the GAIA II for subwoofers up to 120 pounds as well as speakers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour speakers weigh more than 120 pounds each\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-gaia-i-speaker-isolators\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eGAIA I\u003c\/a\u003e carries 220 pounds a set\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Do You Set Them Up?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eUnscrew the factory spikes and match the thread. One side of the adaptor goes into the speaker and the other into the GAIA housing. Thread each stud in at least four full turns. Turn the logo to face your seat, then tighten the locking nut against the base of the speaker.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLift the speaker into place rather than sliding it, because the lower isolators grip the floor. On thick carpet, set a carpet disc under each foot. Level the cabinet, check that the logos face forward, and play.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat most GAIA II owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-stands\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker stands\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — get the tweeters to ear height before you isolate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/floor-carpet-protection-discs\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eFloor and carpet protection discs\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a firm footing on carpet or a soft floor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeaker cables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the next link in the chain after the speakers are settled\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speakers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eSpeakers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the bookshelf and desktop models these are made to sit under\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eFour per speaker, one at each corner, matching the spikes they replace. The GAIA II is sold singly and as a set of four. Order one set per speaker, or eight for a stereo pair.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhich GAIA fits my speakers?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eGo by the weight of one speaker: GAIA III up to 70 pounds, GAIA II up to 120, GAIA I up to 220. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e settles borderline weights in a few seconds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill they fit my speaker's threads?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAdaptors for M6-1.0, M8-1.25 and 1\/4 inch-20 come in the box. If your speaker uses another size, IsoAcoustics supplies other adaptors. Its thread-size guide shows how to measure the insert.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I use them on carpet?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. On low pile the lower isolator grips through the carpet. On thicker carpet or an underpad, IsoAcoustics recommends its \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/isoacoustics-gaia-ii-carpet-disc-set-of-4\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eGAIA II carpet discs\u003c\/a\u003e, which give each foot a solid surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much height do they add?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach GAIA II stands 1.7 inches tall. It replaces the spike or foot rather than stacking on it, so the net change depends on the spike that came out. Measure before you order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics fits GAIA II to a pair of PSB Imagine T3 floorstanders and shows the thread adaptors and the locking nut in use:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/PGrpfzvHR70\" title=\"How to Install IsoAcoustics GAIA II on PSB T3 Speakers - IsoAcoustics\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about speaker placement, floor types, or vibration control? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"IsoAcoustics","offers":[{"title":"4 Set \/ New","offer_id":45982746706093,"sku":"NEW-IAGAIAII-4S","price":339.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Each \/ New","offer_id":45983275188397,"sku":"NEW-IAGAIAII-1","price":104.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/IAGAIAII_4_01-Large__04369.1732634311.1280.1280_b25a7e6d-3ba3-4c65-886d-e328d9460f19.jpg?v=1778118678"},{"product_id":"vibrapod-isolator-isolation-feet-model-3-set-of-four","title":"Vibrapod Isolator Isolation Feet - Model 3 - Set of Four","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Middle Vibrapod, for Components of 32 to 48 Pounds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eVibrapod Isolators are sold as a set of four. Model 3 suits medium-weight amps, DACs, transports and turntables. Each pod is made for 8 to 12 pounds, so four carry a component of 32 to 48 pounds with the load spread evenly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA component's stock feet pass shelf vibration straight into its chassis. Vibrapod designs the Isolators to work in both the vertical and horizontal planes. The component rides on the vinyl pods instead of the shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFive Stiffnesses, One Size: Match the Pod to the Weight\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFit and Load\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach Model 3 pod is rated for 8 to 12 pounds, with 10 pounds recommended. A set of four suits a component of 32 to 48 pounds, with 40 pounds ideal. Vibrapod calls these ranges minimum and maximum guidelines, with the best loading somewhere inside them.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSize and Materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEvery Vibrapod is 9\/16 inch tall and 2 7\/16 inches across, made of vinyl. Vibrapod rates them for 50°F to 100°F.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe pods can leave rings on wood, acrylic or painted surfaces and may dissolve lacquer. Vibrapod advises a bar coaster or playing card under each one.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eChoosing Between the Five Models\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eModel 3 is the middle of five Vibrapod models, and the models differ only in stiffness. A lighter component belongs on the Model 2, made for 4 to 8 pounds a pod. Vibrapod says to match the model to the weight of each component.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eVibrapod also says more pods of a lower model usually perform better than fewer pods of a higher model. When a Vibrapod Cone sits on top, use the Isolator's rating for the pair.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Vibrapods Fit Your System\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eVibrapods go under flat areas of a component, near its edges, with more pods near the heaviest spots. Large, flat feet can sit right on a pod's dome. Small feet should not sit in the dome, and spikes placed in the center will have no effect.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eVibrapod says the pods were not designed for use under carpets or rugs, and may not work with air isolation devices. Do not block a component's ventilation holes with the pods.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe Absolute Sound\u003c\/em\u003e reviewed the Vibrapod Isolators in its June\/July 1999 issue. Reviewer Anna Logg wrote: “Short of a complete megabuck overhaul, I have never heard (or heard of), anything that got that kind of overwhelming, dramatic improvement!”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLucio Cadeddu of \u003cem\u003eTNT-Audio\u003c\/em\u003e tested them in January 1999 and called them “one of the best HiFi devices I know.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eVibrapod notes the Isolators have been a \u003cem\u003eStereophile\u003c\/em\u003e Recommended Component since October 1998.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the Vibrapod Model 3 Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOwners of a medium-weight amp, DAC, transport or turntable of 32 to 48 pounds\u003c\/strong\u003e — four Model 3 pods carry it inside their working range.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTurntable owners\u003c\/strong\u003e — Vibrapod calls its pod-and-shelf \"sandwich\" the best way to isolate a turntable.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eComponents heavier on one side\u003c\/strong\u003e — mix models, with a stiffer pod under the heaviest area.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eComponents over 48 pounds\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/vibrapod-isolator-isolation-feet-model-4-set-of-four\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eModel 4\u003c\/a\u003e is the next step up, made for 14 to 18 pounds a pod.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNot for\u003c\/strong\u003e — tall, thin speakers; Vibrapod says they can be knocked over too easily.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Does It Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWeigh the component, or check its manual, and confirm that 32 to 48 pounds covers it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOn wood, acrylic or painted surfaces, put a coaster or playing card where each pod will sit.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRaise the component on blocks and slide the pods under flat areas near the edges, spaced evenly.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eKeep the pods apart; Vibrapod advises against close triangle groupings where they touch.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFor turntables, tube amps or gear that runs hot, use the sandwich: pods under a light shelf, with the component on top.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eVibrapod Isolators come in Models 1 through 5; this listing is Model 3.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOther gear for an isolated system:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/audio-racks\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAudio racks\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a level, stable home for your components\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/power-conditioners\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003ePower conditioners\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — cleaner power for the gear you are isolating\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/isolation-feet-and-cones\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsolation feet and cones\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — more options for the rest of the rack\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eCables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — connect the components you are isolating\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhich Vibrapod model do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eDivide the component's weight by the number of pods you plan to use. If each pod would carry 8 to 12 pounds, Model 3 is the one.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many pods should I use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eVibrapod says not to use more than necessary. More pods of a lower model usually beat fewer of a higher model. Its example: for a 20-pound component, eight Model 1s usually perform better than four Model 2s.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo the pods go under the stock feet?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLarge, flat feet can sit on the pod's dome. Otherwise, place the pods under flat areas of the chassis. If the feet are too tall or the bottom is uneven, use the sandwich method.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat if a pod gets squashed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eVibrapod says overloaded pods can be restored by heating them on a flat cookie sheet in an oven at 175°F to 200°F. Let them cool fully before use, and never microwave them.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I add the Vibrapod Cones?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/vibrapod-cone-double-truncated-vinyl-isolation-cone-each\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eVibrapod Cone\u003c\/a\u003e can be combined with an Isolator. Vibrapod says to size the pair by the Isolator's weight rating.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOur own overview of the Vibrapod Isolators shows the pods, how they are placed under a component, and the five models:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/PSl2uB9FCTQ\" title=\"Vibrapod Isolation Feet – Audio Advisor\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e40+ Years of Expertise\u003c\/strong\u003e — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee\u003c\/strong\u003e — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eReal Experts, Real Help\u003c\/strong\u003e — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFree Shipping\u003c\/strong\u003e — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFlexible Payment Options\u003c\/strong\u003e — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about component isolation, rack setup, or vibration control? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/learningcenter.audioadvisor.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Vibrapod","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47140424679597,"sku":"NEW-VBPOD-3","price":24.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/VBPOD_01-Large__16798.1725586918.1280.1280_e609b84a-2dd0-4914-8ff2-f81ad4efe6c9.jpg?v=1784817841"},{"product_id":"vibrapod-isolator-isolation-feet-model-2-set-of-four","title":"Vibrapod Isolator Isolation Feet - Model 2 - Set of Four","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFour Vibrapods Tuned for a Component of 16 to 32 Pounds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eVibrapod Isolators are sold as a set of four. Model 2 suits gear such as a CD player, DAC, preamp or integrated amp. Each pod is made for 4 to 8 pounds, so four carry a component of 16 to 32 pounds with the load spread evenly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA component's stock feet pass shelf vibration straight into its chassis. Vibrapod designs the Isolators to work in both the vertical and horizontal planes. The component rides on the vinyl pods instead of the shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFive Stiffnesses, One Size: Match the Pod to the Weight\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFit and Load\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach Model 2 pod is rated for 4 to 8 pounds, with 6 pounds recommended. A set of four suits a component of 16 to 32 pounds, with 24 pounds ideal. Vibrapod calls these ranges minimum and maximum guidelines, with the best loading somewhere inside them.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSize and Materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEvery Vibrapod is 9\/16 inch tall and 2 7\/16 inches across, made of vinyl. Vibrapod rates them for 50°F to 100°F.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe pods can leave rings on wood, acrylic or painted surfaces and may dissolve lacquer. Vibrapod advises a bar coaster or playing card under each one.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eChoosing Between the Five Models\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eModel 2 is the second-softest of five Vibrapod models, and the models differ only in stiffness. A lighter component belongs on the Model 1, made for 2 to 3 pounds a pod. Vibrapod says to match the model to the weight of each component.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eVibrapod also says more pods of a lower model usually perform better than fewer pods of a higher model. When a Vibrapod Cone sits on top, use the Isolator's rating for the pair.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Vibrapods Fit Your System\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eVibrapods go under flat areas of a component, near its edges, with more pods near the heaviest spots. Large, flat feet can sit right on a pod's dome. Small feet should not sit in the dome, and spikes placed in the center will have no effect.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eVibrapod says the pods were not designed for use under carpets or rugs, and may not work with air isolation devices. Do not block a component's ventilation holes with the pods.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe Absolute Sound\u003c\/em\u003e reviewed the Vibrapod Isolators in its June\/July 1999 issue. Reviewer Anna Logg wrote: “Short of a complete megabuck overhaul, I have never heard (or heard of), anything that got that kind of overwhelming, dramatic improvement!”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLucio Cadeddu of \u003cem\u003eTNT-Audio\u003c\/em\u003e tested them in January 1999 and called them “one of the best HiFi devices I know.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eVibrapod notes the Isolators have been a \u003cem\u003eStereophile\u003c\/em\u003e Recommended Component since October 1998.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the Vibrapod Model 2 Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOwners of a CD player, DAC, preamp or integrated amp of 16 to 32 pounds\u003c\/strong\u003e — four Model 2 pods carry it inside their working range.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTurntable owners\u003c\/strong\u003e — Vibrapod calls its pod-and-shelf \"sandwich\" the best way to isolate a turntable.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eComponents heavier on one side\u003c\/strong\u003e — mix models, with a stiffer pod under the heaviest area.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eComponents over 32 pounds\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/vibrapod-isolator-isolation-feet-model-3-set-of-four\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eModel 3\u003c\/a\u003e is the next step up, made for 8 to 12 pounds a pod.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNot for\u003c\/strong\u003e — tall, thin speakers; Vibrapod says they can be knocked over too easily.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Does It Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWeigh the component, or check its manual, and confirm that 16 to 32 pounds covers it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOn wood, acrylic or painted surfaces, put a coaster or playing card where each pod will sit.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRaise the component on blocks and slide the pods under flat areas near the edges, spaced evenly.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eKeep the pods apart; Vibrapod advises against close triangle groupings where they touch.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFor turntables, tube amps or gear that runs hot, use the sandwich: pods under a light shelf, with the component on top.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eVibrapod Isolators come in Models 1 through 5; this listing is Model 2.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOther gear for an isolated system:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/audio-racks\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAudio racks\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a level, stable home for your components\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/power-conditioners\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003ePower conditioners\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — cleaner power for the gear you are isolating\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/isolation-feet-and-cones\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsolation feet and cones\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — more options for the rest of the rack\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eCables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — connect the components you are isolating\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhich Vibrapod model do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eDivide the component's weight by the number of pods you plan to use. If each pod would carry 4 to 8 pounds, Model 2 is the one.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many pods should I use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eVibrapod says not to use more than necessary. More pods of a lower model usually beat fewer of a higher model. Its example: for a 20-pound component, eight Model 1s usually perform better than four Model 2s.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo the pods go under the stock feet?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLarge, flat feet can sit on the pod's dome. Otherwise, place the pods under flat areas of the chassis. If the feet are too tall or the bottom is uneven, use the sandwich method.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat if a pod gets squashed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eVibrapod says overloaded pods can be restored by heating them on a flat cookie sheet in an oven at 175°F to 200°F. Let them cool fully before use, and never microwave them.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I add the Vibrapod Cones?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/vibrapod-cone-double-truncated-vinyl-isolation-cone-each\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eVibrapod Cone\u003c\/a\u003e can be combined with an Isolator. Vibrapod says to size the pair by the Isolator's weight rating.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOur own overview of the Vibrapod Isolators shows the pods, how they are placed under a component, and the five models:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/PSl2uB9FCTQ\" title=\"Vibrapod Isolation Feet – Audio Advisor\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e40+ Years of Expertise\u003c\/strong\u003e — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee\u003c\/strong\u003e — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eReal Experts, Real Help\u003c\/strong\u003e — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFree Shipping\u003c\/strong\u003e — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFlexible Payment Options\u003c\/strong\u003e — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about component isolation, rack setup, or vibration control? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/learningcenter.audioadvisor.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Vibrapod","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47140662214829,"sku":"NEW-VBPOD-2","price":24.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/VBPOD_01-Large__16798.1725586918.1280.1280_e609b84a-2dd0-4914-8ff2-f81ad4efe6c9.jpg?v=1784817841"},{"product_id":"vibrapod-isolator-isolation-feet-model-4-set-of-four","title":"Vibrapod Isolator Isolation Feet - Model 4 - Set of Four","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eA Firmer Vibrapod for Heavy Components of 56 to 72 Pounds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eVibrapod Isolators are sold as a set of four. Model 4 suits heavy amps, DACs, transports and turntables. Each pod is made for 14 to 18 pounds, so four carry a component of 56 to 72 pounds with the load spread evenly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA component's stock feet pass shelf vibration straight into its chassis. Vibrapod designs the Isolators to work in both the vertical and horizontal planes. The component rides on the vinyl pods instead of the shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFive Stiffnesses, One Size: Match the Pod to the Weight\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFit and Load\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach Model 4 pod is rated for 14 to 18 pounds, with 16 pounds recommended. A set of four suits a component of 56 to 72 pounds, with 64 pounds ideal. Vibrapod calls these ranges minimum and maximum guidelines, with the best loading somewhere inside them.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSize and Materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEvery Vibrapod is 9\/16 inch tall and 2 7\/16 inches across, made of vinyl. Vibrapod rates them for 50°F to 100°F.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe pods can leave rings on wood, acrylic or painted surfaces and may dissolve lacquer. Vibrapod advises a bar coaster or playing card under each one.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eChoosing Between the Five Models\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eModel 4 is the second-stiffest of five Vibrapod models, and the models differ only in stiffness. A lighter component belongs on the Model 3, made for 8 to 12 pounds a pod. Vibrapod says to match the model to the weight of each component.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eVibrapod also says more pods of a lower model usually perform better than fewer pods of a higher model. When a Vibrapod Cone sits on top, use the Isolator's rating for the pair.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Vibrapods Fit Your System\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eVibrapods go under flat areas of a component, near its edges, with more pods near the heaviest spots. Large, flat feet can sit right on a pod's dome. Small feet should not sit in the dome, and spikes placed in the center will have no effect.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eVibrapod says the pods were not designed for use under carpets or rugs, and may not work with air isolation devices. Do not block a component's ventilation holes with the pods.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe Absolute Sound\u003c\/em\u003e reviewed the Vibrapod Isolators in its June\/July 1999 issue. Reviewer Anna Logg wrote: “Short of a complete megabuck overhaul, I have never heard (or heard of), anything that got that kind of overwhelming, dramatic improvement!”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLucio Cadeddu of \u003cem\u003eTNT-Audio\u003c\/em\u003e tested them in January 1999 and called them “one of the best HiFi devices I know.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eVibrapod notes the Isolators have been a \u003cem\u003eStereophile\u003c\/em\u003e Recommended Component since October 1998.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the Vibrapod Model 4 Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOwners of a heavy amp, DAC, transport or turntable of 56 to 72 pounds\u003c\/strong\u003e — four Model 4 pods carry it inside their working range.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTurntable owners\u003c\/strong\u003e — Vibrapod calls its pod-and-shelf \"sandwich\" the best way to isolate a turntable.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eComponents heavier on one side\u003c\/strong\u003e — mix models, with a stiffer pod under the heaviest area.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eComponents over 72 pounds\u003c\/strong\u003e — the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/vibrapod-isolator-isolation-feet-model-5-set-of-four\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eModel 5\u003c\/a\u003e is the next step up, made for 22 to 28 pounds a pod.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNot for\u003c\/strong\u003e — tall, thin speakers; Vibrapod says they can be knocked over too easily.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Does It Connect to Your System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWeigh the component, or check its manual, and confirm that 56 to 72 pounds covers it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOn wood, acrylic or painted surfaces, put a coaster or playing card where each pod will sit.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRaise the component on blocks and slide the pods under flat areas near the edges, spaced evenly.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eKeep the pods apart; Vibrapod advises against close triangle groupings where they touch.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFor turntables, tube amps or gear that runs hot, use the sandwich: pods under a light shelf, with the component on top.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eVibrapod Isolators come in Models 1 through 5; this listing is Model 4.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOther gear for an isolated system:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/audio-racks\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAudio racks\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a level, stable home for your components\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/power-conditioners\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003ePower conditioners\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — cleaner power for the gear you are isolating\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/isolation-feet-and-cones\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsolation feet and cones\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — more options for the rest of the rack\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eCables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — connect the components you are isolating\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhich Vibrapod model do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eDivide the component's weight by the number of pods you plan to use. If each pod would carry 14 to 18 pounds, Model 4 is the one.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many pods should I use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eVibrapod says not to use more than necessary. More pods of a lower model usually beat fewer of a higher model. Its example: for a 20-pound component, eight Model 1s usually perform better than four Model 2s.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDo the pods go under the stock feet?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLarge, flat feet can sit on the pod's dome. Otherwise, place the pods under flat areas of the chassis. If the feet are too tall or the bottom is uneven, use the sandwich method.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat if a pod gets squashed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eVibrapod says overloaded pods can be restored by heating them on a flat cookie sheet in an oven at 175°F to 200°F. Let them cool fully before use, and never microwave them.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I add the Vibrapod Cones?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/vibrapod-cone-double-truncated-vinyl-isolation-cone-each\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eVibrapod Cone\u003c\/a\u003e can be combined with an Isolator. Vibrapod says to size the pair by the Isolator's weight rating.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.5em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOur own overview of the Vibrapod Isolators shows the pods, how they are placed under a component, and the five models:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/PSl2uB9FCTQ\" title=\"Vibrapod Isolation Feet – Audio Advisor\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e40+ Years of Expertise\u003c\/strong\u003e — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee\u003c\/strong\u003e — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eReal Experts, Real Help\u003c\/strong\u003e — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFree Shipping\u003c\/strong\u003e — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFlexible Payment Options\u003c\/strong\u003e — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about component isolation, rack setup, or vibration control? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/learningcenter.audioadvisor.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Vibrapod","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47144500363437,"sku":"NEW-VBPOD-4","price":24.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/VBPOD_01-Large__16798.1725586918.1280.1280_e609b84a-2dd0-4914-8ff2-f81ad4efe6c9.jpg?v=1784817841"},{"product_id":"isoacoustics-delos-isolation-platform-walnut-22-x-16-x-4","title":"IsoAcoustics DELOS Isolation Platform - Walnut - 22\" x 16\" x 3\"","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width: 720px; margin: 0 auto; padding: 32px 24px 48px 24px; background: #ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size: 1.25em; margin: 0 0 0.35em 0; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eA Butcher-Block Isolation Platform for Turntables up to 100 Pounds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003eThe IsoAcoustics DELOS is sold singly, one platform per box, in maple or walnut, two sizes and two thicknesses. It is a solid hardwood butcher block with IsoAcoustics isolators fastened into its underside, made to carry a turntable or tube amplifier of up to 100 pounds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003eA turntable stylus reads movements far smaller than the footsteps, speaker energy and motor hum that travel through a shelf. IsoAcoustics designs the DELOS to combine the mass of a thick block with its isolators, so the turntable rides on the isolators rather than on the shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003eEvery option here carries the same isolation design. The choice comes down to the footprint your turntable needs, the weight it puts on the block, and whether maple or walnut suits the room.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size: 1.25em; margin: 1.4em 0 0.35em 0; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eFour Sizes, Two Woods, One Rule: Match the Block to the Weight\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size: 1.05em; margin: 0.9em 0 0.25em 0; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eFit, Load and Materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003eThe 18 by 15 inch block has four isolators and carries 65 pounds at 1.75 inches thick or 55 pounds at 3 inches. The 22 by 16 inch block has six isolators and carries 100 pounds at 1.75 inches or 90 pounds at 3 inches. The thicker block weighs more itself, which is why its rating is lower.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003eNo minimum is published, but an isolator loaded far under its rating never reaches its working range, so a 20-pound turntable sits better on the zaZen. Add the block's thickness to your turntable's height when checking a rack shelf, and allow width for an outboard motor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003eMaple has a light amber color and a Janka hardness of 1450. Walnut is dark brown with visible grain and a Janka hardness of 1100. IsoAcoustics says both woods perform the same, so the choice is appearance. The isolators are recessed into the block and fastened to it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size: 1.25em; margin: 1.4em 0 0.35em 0; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003eJason Thorpe reviewed the walnut 22 by 16 inch DELOS for \u003cem\u003eSoundStage! Ultra\u003c\/em\u003e under his VPI turntable and concluded: “The Delos provides real improvements for a reasonable price.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003ePaul Rigby tried both sizes for \u003cem\u003eThe Audiophile Man\u003c\/em\u003e and wrote of the smaller block, “I found improvements wherever I used it”, with the biggest change under his preamplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size: 1.25em; margin: 1.4em 0 0.35em 0; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eWho Is the DELOS Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; padding-left: 1.4em; line-height: 1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou own a turntable of 40 to 100 pounds\u003c\/strong\u003e — the four blocks cover that range, and the selector names the one for your weight\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour turntable has an outboard motor\u003c\/strong\u003e — the 22 by 16 inch block gives the motor and the plinth one level, isolated surface\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou run a heavy tube amplifier on a rack\u003c\/strong\u003e — the block carries the chassis and its feet on a single isolated platform\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou want the platform to read as furniture\u003c\/strong\u003e — solid maple or walnut, finished as a butcher block, in two thicknesses\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYour turntable weighs less than 40 pounds\u003c\/strong\u003e — the zaZen platforms, rated 25 and 40 pounds, keep a lighter deck inside its working range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size: 1.25em; margin: 1.4em 0 0.35em 0; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eHow Do You Set It Up?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003eClear the shelf and set the DELOS where the turntable will stand. Check that it sits level, since the isolators need even loading. Lower the turntable onto the block, centered, with its own feet on the wood. Re-level the turntable if it has adjustable feet. Cue a record and listen.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size: 1.25em; margin: 1.4em 0 0.35em 0; font-weight: 600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003eWhat most DELOS owners shop next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; padding-left: 1.4em; line-height: 1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/turntables\" style=\"color: #8a5a2b;\"\u003eTurntables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the component that gains most from a still, level base\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/turntable-accessories\" style=\"color: #8a5a2b;\"\u003eTurntable accessories\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — levels, mats and clamps for the same setup\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/phono-preamplifiers\" style=\"color: #8a5a2b;\"\u003ePhono preamplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — the next component in the vinyl chain\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/record-cleaning-accessories\" style=\"color: #8a5a2b;\"\u003eRecord cleaning accessories\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e — a clean groove is the other half of quiet playback\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size: 1.25em; margin: 1.4em 0 0.35em 0; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size: 1.05em; margin: 0.9em 0 0.25em 0; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eHow many do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003eOne platform per component. The DELOS is sold singly, so order one for the turntable and another for any other component you want to isolate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size: 1.05em; margin: 0.9em 0 0.25em 0; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eWhich DELOS fits my turntable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003eGo by footprint and weight. The 18 by 15 inch block carries 65 pounds at 1.75 inches thick or 55 at 3 inches. The 22 by 16 inch block carries 100 or 90 pounds. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/calculator.isoacoustics.com\/\" style=\"color: #8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics online weight selector\u003c\/a\u003e settles borderline cases.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size: 1.05em; margin: 0.9em 0 0.25em 0; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eWhy does the thicker block carry less?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003eThe 3-inch block is heavier than the 1.75-inch block, and that extra wood loads the same isolators. IsoAcoustics rates the thicker version 10 pounds lower for that reason.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size: 1.05em; margin: 0.9em 0 0.25em 0; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eIs maple better than walnut?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003eIsoAcoustics says the two woods give the same isolation performance. Maple is lighter in color and harder; walnut is darker with more visible grain. Choose the one that suits your rack.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size: 1.05em; margin: 0.9em 0 0.25em 0; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eWill it fit my turntable and motor?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003eMeasure the plinth and any outboard motor together. The 18 by 15 inch block suits most single-chassis turntables; a separate motor or a wide plinth usually needs the 22 by 16 inch block.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size: 1.25em; margin: 1.4em 0 0.35em 0; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.5em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003eSee the IsoAcoustics DELOS platform unboxed and examined in both hardwood finishes:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/F6Fu-cwy8U4\" title=\"Unboxing the IsoAcoustics Delos: Isolation Meets Elegance\" style=\"border: 0; margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; display: block;\"\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.5em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003eSee the DELOS platform explained, sized, and compared with IsoAcoustics’ lighter-duty zaZen platform:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/Fd17qvVsaPM\" title=\"IsoAcoustics zaZen vs Delos Isolation Base Platforms for high end audio\" style=\"border: 0; margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; display: block;\"\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size: 1.25em; margin: 1.4em 0 0.35em 0; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; padding-left: 1.4em; line-height: 1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size: 1.25em; margin: 1.4em 0 0.35em 0; font-weight: 600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin: 0 0 0.9em 0; line-height: 1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about turntable setup, rack placement, or vibration control? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/blogs\/learning-center\" style=\"color: #8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"IsoAcoustics","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":47446157164717,"sku":"NEW-IADELOS-2216W2-WAL","price":989.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/IADELOS_1815W1_02-Large__88446.1725593518.1280.1280_cd65f3f5-1d13-44ee-9440-70058f6c8d70.jpg?v=1778142722"}],"url":"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/speaker-subwoofer-isolation-stands.oembed?page=2","provider":"Audio Advisor","version":"1.0","type":"link"}